The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutResolution - 5799 - Contract - Pharr & Company - LP&L Office Renovations - 03_26_1998RESOLUTION NO. 5799 Item #25 March 26, 1998 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract, attached herewith, by and between the City of Lubbock and Pharr & Company of Lubbock, Texas, to install and furnish all materials and services as bid for the Lubbock Power & Light Office Renovations, and any associated documents. Said Contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this Resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 26th day of March _,1998. AT EST: ; " &"JA ayth'e Darnell, City Secretary viiv'i6� APPRAS TO CONTENT: Victor Kilm , Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas, Municipal Contracts Attorney wd: wd/ccdocs/pharrcompany. res March 16, 1998 CHANGE ORDER #:Four (4) Resolution No. 5799 Item No. 24 November 19, 1998 CITY OF LUBBOCK CHANGE ORDER CONTRACTOR: Pharr & Company DATE: November 2,1998 CITY OF LUBBOCK BID#: 98034 PROJECT NAME: LP&L Office Renovations @1301 Broadway DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Additional construction works to the contract documents as indicated on the attached document. The total amount of this change order is $53,921.00. i 31-W y Colo A. ORIGINAL CONTRACT VALUE: B. AMOUNT OF THIS CHANGE ORDER: Council approval required if over $25,000 C PERCENT OF CONTRACT VALUE THIS CHANGE ORDER (B/A): D. AMOUNT OF PREVIOUS CHANGE ORDERS: E. TOTAL AMOUNT OF ALL CHANGE ORDER (B+D): F. PERCENT OF CONTRACT OF ALL CHANGE ORDERS (E/A):25%M. G. NEW CONTRACT AMOUNT (A+E): SIGNATURES AND DATE 4*R4EWENTATIVE V�&K4" if/3 /Ie PURCHA G DEPARTMENT - Cq; k CITY MANAGER ATTEST: /��- 4:t4;,-� I Y SECRETARY $898,034.55 AO_/ AV 3*0 RR SIGNATURE EGAL DEPA&TMENT 42- zt" ;�R7 / MAYOR(khange odm ova $25,000) r VMWAal V'CtAac" ��o'n�j�:etcial �an�f�cc�ian October 28, 1998 Stiles and Stiles, Architects 3307 Avenue X Lubbock, Texas 79411 ATTENTION: ED STILES REFERENCE: LUBBOCK POWER & LIGHT OFFICE RENOVATION PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER #4 REVISED 9 0 max 27.9-1 ZeMoc/, 46W 7.9408 (806) 763-5203 Sax (806) 762-59M PHARR & COMPANY proposes the following added cost for design changes at the above referenced project: General Conditions(10 weeks) $ 2,050.00 Supervision(10 weeks) 14,000.00 Demo, Drywall, Acoustical 2,733.00 Carpet, VCT, Base 890.00 Millwork 2,445.00 Painting and Vinyl 18,120.00 -� Electrical 10,775.00 deducted from previous bid (-1.994.00) Subtotal 49,019.00 Mark -Up (10%) 4,902.00 TOTAL $ 53,921.00 If this change order is accepted, we will need a sixty-five (65) day extension to the contract. Please advise us of the action you wish taken on this proposed change order. If you have any questions, feel free to contact our office. Respectfully submitted, PH & COMPANY rmmy R. Ph Presr JR Pnl 6-17 q '7 CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY BID #98034 t� t t x o (( 11 Af r'0 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas F F P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 a Fax (806) 775-21 ADDENDUM #9 ITB #98034 LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY ITB 098034, Addendum #1 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: March 4,1998 CLOSE DATE: March 10,1998 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Enclosed please find the two page Addendum #1 from Stiles & Stiles Architects. All requests for additional Information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (M) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mall.ci.lubbock.tx.us AYO Ron Shuffiel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 98034ad1.doc 4' CITY OF LUBBOCK LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS 1301 BROADWAY, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 CITY OF LUBBOCK BID # 98034 Architects Job Number: 97-008 March 5, 1998 ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the original drawings and specifications of the above identified project. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS: Item No.l: For clarification, the existing freight elevator located in the South West corner of the building will be made available to the Contractor during all phases of the work. The Contractor shall have the option to use other methods for removal of materials so long as they are properly barricaded and do not block access to the building. Item No.2: On the Drawings, Sheet A7, Floor Plan - First Floor Level, DELETE all demolition work, general construction, mechanical and electrical work indicated for Office 117 and Office 118. This change shall also eliminate the installation of doors marked No.10 and No.11. This change shall NOT eliminate the requirement to furnish new carpet flooring as scheduled. Item No.3: On the Drawings, Sheet A13, Door And Frame Schedule, under Frames (Fire Rating), change doors marked No. 5, 28, 29, 44, 45 and 46 to read "90 Minute". The Contractor shall have the option to furnish hollow metal frames in lieu of wood frames. The head and jambs of each of these hollow metal frames shall be covered with wood trim to match new wood frame doors as scheduled. Item No.4: On the Drawings, Sheet A14, Door And Frame Types, change all references to "Medium Bronze Anodized Finish" to read "Dark Bronze Anodized Finish". Item No.S: On the Drawings, Sheet A20, Reflected Ceiling Plan - First Floor Level, where portions of existing gypsum board ceilings are required.to be removed or reworked to receive new mechanical ducts and/or grilles, the coffered ceiling area where the work is being preformed shall be completely retextured and repainted from corner to corner'to provide a uniform appearance. Coffered ceiling areas where work is not required shall not require retexturing or repainting. Page l of 2 FMECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS: Item No.l: On the Drawings, Sheet M7, add the following Demolition Note: The Contractor shall remove all existing mechanical piping, duckwork, air distribution devices, terminal boxes and all associated appurtenances. The Contractor shall verify the exact scope of the work and existing conditions with actual field inspections. Item No.2: On the Drawings, Sheet E7, the lighting circuit in the Library shall be as described in Note #6. Item No.3: On the Drawings, Sheet E7, provide 2 SPST switches to serve Lighting in work area 228. Locate the switches on the outside wind wall of Computer Room 216. Verify exact location with Architect at jobsite. Item No.4: On the Drawings, Sheet E13, remove the case heater and battery charger from Panel EM98 and add to Panel EB98. Item No.S: On the Drawings, Sheet E14, in the Electrical Riser Diagram, Base Bid, add the circuits for the case heater and battery charger to Panel EA98. End of Addendum Number One 4 (: i 1 �. y-b,�'?> Stiles & Stiles, Architects 3307 Avenue X Lubbock, Texas 79411 (806) 795 6431 Agnew Associates, Inc. 3223 So. Loop 289, Suite 424 Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 799 0753 Page 2 of 2 CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS BID NUMBER: 98034 PROJECT NUMBER: 9354.9212 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT F INDEX r 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS r" f 7; NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID #98034 C Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock P.m. on the 10th day of March 1998, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. �.. it Is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. f The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 26th day of March,1998, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with .: Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Ratin of P or superior, as the rating of the bond company is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without 4 : recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of r. award of the contract to him. t It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on ,26th day of February. at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the L04 - Purchasing Conference Room, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages Included In the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 767-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. 1CIITY OF LU BOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806)775-2167/Fax (806)775-2164. No Text r 19 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS t. SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project In accordance with contract documents for the I -P&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY. 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. 4. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806) 776-2164 5. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 178 (ONE HUNDRED SEVENTY-EIGHT) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it Is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. C6. PAYMENT All payments due toCo ntractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. r c 4 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 8. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will, be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects,, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City Issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13, PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 15. EXPLOSIVES G The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from G the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it '~ shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their r" property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage r resulting from his blasting operations. i ,,, 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. r. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. 3 The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or `— Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. 4 G r+ a The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. 21. PREPARATION FOR BID The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (0 General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. F r n 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. 6 -- No Text � A � 4- 1. � BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT F LACE: Lubbock, Texas DATE: March 10, 1998 PROJECT NUMBER: #98034 - LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY Bid of PHARR CONSTRUCTION CO., INC. d/b/a Pharr & Company (hereinafter called Bidder) FTo the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: FThe Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a Renovation of L P & L Of fice r l ,having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the Intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. „MATERIALS: ($ J�D, oOb.CC' SERVICES: ($ TOTAL BASE BID: /1/i 1,012 ALTERNATE 1: Delete all work as per Altema:e « 1, Section 01030, page 2, Schedule of Qltemates. MATERIALS: ($ /3 D, pOD, c o } i SERVICES: (g p,3 FTOTAL ALTERNATE 1 (DEDUCT): 74y'o /9024mw %Iso-se W Al1Ar:5 (s ' 2 "-S. O aP , Ofl } 7.1 ALTERNATE 2: Delete all work as per Alternate #2, Section 01030, page 2, Schedule of Alternates. t MATERIALS: ($_ a r SERVICES: ($ a 0 re 0, c ) TOTAL ALTERNATE 2 (DEDUC- ALTERNATE 3: e �5 DAD, po Delete all work as per Alternate #3, Section 01030, page 2, Schedule of Alternates. MATERIALS: SERVICES: TOTAL ALTERNATE 3 (DEDUCT): H fllJL? /flp✓:Psrd /Jve41-S ($ aa0. o ) ALTERNATE 4: Delete all work as per Alternate #4, Section 01030, page 2, Schedule of Alternates. ` MATERIALS: ($, o ca o c ) SERVICES: ($ TOTAL ALTERNATE 4 (DEDUCT): P/o2�l his! *"- ///o//gis ` (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 178 (ONE HUNDRED SEVENTY-EIGHT) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $750.00 (SEVEN HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with Instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality In the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. l The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the �• plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. j� Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond Is required, to submit a cashier's check or !!, certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total �... amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if i required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. 2 r 0 Enclosed with this bid is a Cashiers Check or Certified Check for -0- Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of 5% of total amount bid Dollars ($ 5% ), which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by ,the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. thorized Si tore Jimmy R. Tharr, President (Printed or Typed Name) Pharr & Company Company P.O. Box 2791 Address Lubbock Lubbock City, County Texas , 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: 806 - 763-5263 Fax: 806 - 763-5843 (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTrM ST: Secretary Jackie Norrell Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. 1 Date 3/4/98 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date Addenda No. Date 3 r i t Rdelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Baltimore, Maryland A Stock Company Bid Bond Bond Number ........................ Know all Men By These Presents: That .... Pharr. �.Qos.%ryjgti on. CQ,.,. _Il1q. dba„Pharr, A. Company . ..... . .. . ..... . .... . . ................................................ of .Lubbock, Texas............................... ...... as Principal, and the other undersigned, as Suretyare held and firmly bound unto :. Lubbock................................................ City, of ...................................................................................................... as Obligee, in the full and just sum of .....FIVE PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID BY PRINCIAL------- ......................................... i.5z. 4f . B i Q ....................................... Dollars, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, , executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Whereas, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal L.P.& L. Office Renovations The Condition Of This Obligation is such that if the aforsaid Principal shall be awarded the contract the said s. . Principal will, within the time required, enter into a formal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the contract, then this obligation to be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the difference in money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the r i f F F Obligee legally contracts with another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former, but in no event shall liability hereunder exceed the penal sum hereof. Signed, sealed and delivered (Date) parr Construction C I ............... ll .Pharr..&. Companyc ............ (seal) �de��...... (Seal) etity and G ranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. la Wisconsin Corporation) fir:!. .... ....................... Staci Gross Attorney -in -fact Contract 5001"4) 89015 Rdelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Power of Attome Y No. 594 Know all men by these per: That fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, lac. a corporation organized and existing ender the laws of the State of Wisconsin and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland. does hereby =hstinrte and appoint Donal Bo ley, Steve Deal and Staci Gross of the City of Wichita Falls , State of Texas its to end lawful Attorney(Oi-Fam each in their separate eapacity if am than one is remed above. to sign its name as VJMW 10. and to exearoe, seal and admowledge any and all fronft udertaings cattracts and other written instruments in to nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its btuiness of guaranteeing the fidelity of phtsorhs: guaranteeing the performance of r r a w. and e:amning or 9uaranmeing bonds and widertalOngs required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In Witness Whereof. the said Fidelity and Guaranty fosorance Underwriters Inc. has used this klStrornent W be sealed with its corporate seat. duly attested by the signaumes of its Yee President and Assistant Secretary, this 13 th dayof February • , A.D.19 9 8. Fidelity and Goamrq Insnrsace Underwriters, t �..........�. l:...................e .... Presidnnt� 19�1 raigned) By .........!.rA�.s.�. ..C.i: i .. .......... s State of Maryland I otic Baltimore City ) 0 Onthis 13th dayof February AD.190-1,tefaeme �ayAWilsar,Y President of Fideftyand Guarantylasmance Underwriters, Inc. and Thomas E Huibregtse. Assistant of said Company. vuthom I am inted, who being by me severally duty sworn, said. that they, the said Gary A. Wilson and Thanes were M► Rice President Secretary of the said Fidelity and Guaranty dhstaance Underwritees, w the corporation n and vAdc h Power . that they each li ew the seal of raid corporation: that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was ate Seal. that it by order at - Directors of said - pa don. and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Yee President and hs t Seaetaty. . of the Company. Gv My Commission expires the 1st ' day s t A.D. yt... .. ......F .Hbtary This Power of Attorney is Wanted wider, utlhaitY of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the FidaGty and Guaranty'' IrtsuanceUoderwriterslae.September24.199Z , )NN Resolved, that in conniectim with the fidelity and stery inswance business of the company. all bads. urhdertafungs, corrtraas and other instrortheats reiating to said business may be signed. executed, and admowledged by persons or enoties appointed as Attoney(sHn*act pursuant to a Pam of Attorney issued in axmb= with these resolutions. Said PowerW of Atotrey for end on behalf of the Canparry may and shall be ere jW in the time and on behalf of the Company, eider by the Chairman. or the President or an Eccuti a Yee President or a Senior Yee President, or a Yee President or an Assistant Vice President jointly with the Semamy or an Assistant Secretary. under their respective desiVoliatu. The signature of suds offiCei maybe ahgrwmd. printed or lithographed. The signature of each of the foregoing offimis and the seal of the Company maybe affixed by faaunile to any Power of Atormey or to any mificate relating thereto appoirtirg Atorney(sNn*= for purposes or ly of executing and attestiM bads and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof. and snubject to any limbdoa set forth therem, any Such Pam of Anomey or certificate bearing Such laairtrile signorine or facsimile seal shalt be valid and binding upon the Company and any Such power so executed and certified by Such faesirnile signature and taaanile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to arry bad or mdertaldng to which it is validly attadhed. Resolved. That Atmrr *)-in Fact Shall have tte power and authority and. in any case, subject to the tutus and limitatias of the Power of Attorney issued to then to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company W any and an bads and a dertalangs, and ado writh obligatory in the rratrte thereof. and any such instrwrhent axeauted by such Atmrneyts!-in Fact shall be as binding upon the Conhpamr as if signed by an Executive Officrl srd seated and attested to by tte Secretary of the Company. i. Thorthas E Hwlmgtse. an Assistant Secretary of the Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters lac. de hereby certify that the foregoing are true extxrpts from the Resolutions of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24, ISM and that Vise Resolutions are in ftdl face and effect t the undersigrhed Assistant Secretary of the Fidelity and Guaranty Insuranee Underwriters, l= do hereby certify that the foregarg Power of Attorney is in lull force and effect and has not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof. I have hereunto set my hand and the seal of the Fidelity and Guaranty' snraree Underwriters, fum on thls loth dayof March •19 98,....;..� etCORlOAREa Atastara Secretary 1951 FS 81(1M) A 0 s a obD t P.O. BOX 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-21 ADDENDUM #1 ITB #98034 LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY ITB #98034, Addendum 91 Office of Purchasing MAR U 5 1596 MAILED TO VENDOR: March 4, 1998 CLOSE DATE: March 10, 1998 @ 2:00 PM The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any Item called for in the ITB documents Is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain In effect. 1. Enclosed please find the two page Addendum 01 from Stiles & Stiles Architects. All requests for additional Information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@rnall.cl.lubbockbc.us THMK YO , Ron Shuffiel Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID 98034ad1.doe CITY OF LUBBOCK LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS 1301 BROADWAY, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 CITY OF LUBBOCK BID # 98034 (� Architects Job Number: 97-008 ( March 5, 1998 ADDENDUM NUMBER ONE NOTICE TO ALL BIDDERS: The following shall be incorporated in and become a part of the original drawings and specifications of the above identified project. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION ITEMS: Item No.l: For clarification, the existing freight elevator located in the South West corner of the building will be made available to the Contractor during all phases of the work. The Contractor shall have the option to use other methods for removal of materials so long as they are properly barricaded and do not block access to the building. Item No.2: On the Drawings, Sheet A7, Floor Plan - First Floor Level, DELETE all demolition work, general construction, mechanical and electrical work indicated for Office 117 and Office 118. This change shall also eliminate the installation of doors marked No.10 and No.11. This change shall NOT eliminate the requirement to furnish new carpet r. flooring as scheduled. s Item No.3: On the Drawings, Sheet A13, Door And Frame Schedule, under Frames (Fire Rating), change doors marked No. 5, 28, 29, 44, 45 and 46 T to read "90 Minute". The Contractor shall have the option to furnish hollow metal frames in lieu of wood frames. The head and jambs of each of these hollow metal frames shall be covered with wood trim to match new wood frame doors as scheduled. Item No.4: On the Drawings, Sheet A14, Door And Frame Types, change all references to "Medium Bronze Anodized Finish" to read "Dark Bronze Anodized Finish". Item No.5: On the Drawings, Sheet A20, Reflected Ceiling Plan - First r- Floor Level, where portions of existing gypsum board ceilings are required to be removed or reworked to receive new mechanical ducts and/or grilles, the coffered ceiling area where the work is being preformed shall be completely retextured and repainted from corner to corner to provide a uniform appearance. Coffered ceiling areas where x work is not required shall not require retexturing or repainting. r Page 1 of 2 r 0 FMECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS: Item No.l: On the Drawings, Sheet M7, add the following Demolition Note: The Contractor shall remove all existing mechanical piping, duckwork, air distribution devices, terminal boxes and all associated appurtenances. The Contractor shall verify the exact scope of the work and existing conditions with actual field inspections. Item No.2: On the Drawings, Sheet E7, the lighting circuit in the Library shall be as described in Note #6. Item No.3: On the Drawings, Sheet E7, provide 2 SPST switches to serve Lighting in work area 228. Locate the switches on the outside wind wall of Computer Room 216. Verify exact location with Architect at jobsite. Item No.4: On the Drawings, Sheet E13, remove the case heater and battery charger from Panel EM98 and add to Panel EB98. Item No.S: On the Drawings, Sheet E14, in the Electrical Riser Diagram, Base Bid, add the circuits for the case heater and battery charger to Panel EA98. End of Addendum Number One Stiles & Stiles, Architects 3307 Avenue X Lubbock, Texas 79411 (806) 795 6431 Agnew Associates, Inc. 3223 So. Loop 289, Suite 424 Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 799 0753 Page 2 of 2 r PAN APR-07-98 TUE 11:62 AM PHARR & COMPANY FAX NO, 8067635843 P.02 G STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as r Principal(s), and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. l (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of $800, 481.00 Dollars ($ 800,481.0)Qawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 25th day of March 19 98 , to $}d a92034-1-P&I. r)ffir-p Ppnnyations at 1301 Broadway and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and seated this instrument this 1 _c;t day of Aiari1 19 98 . Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Pharr & Company Surety Princi I it e) Staci Gross Attorney -in -Fact Title) Jimmy Pharr ent (Title) By: d (Title) ( F ANK-U t-U8 -CUL 11: b3 An rhHKK & uunrHnY t' HX NU. duo r 00004J r. yo The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates Alm H37XY h931'�'an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and c whom service of process may be had In matters arising out of such suretyship. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance,underwriters, Inc. Sure "B Staci Gross (Title) Attorney -in -Fact Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showirg that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 7 88926 I Rdellty and Guaranty Insurance Underwrkers, Inc. to U S Fes• Power of Attorney No. 594 Know all men by these presents: That Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc- a corporation organized and existing under the Jaws of the State of Wisconsin and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore. in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint Donal, Boley, , Steve Deal and Staci Gross fd the city fd Wichita Falls . State of Texas its true and lawful Anxney(sHm-Fact each in their separate capacity if mote than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute. seal and adahawfedge any and all bads, urdertalcings. cnttraas and other vvntten bnsturnen in the nattae thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of rprarameeing the fidelity of persons: guaranteeing the performw= of contracts: and euxecrting or guaranteeing bfrr& and undertalri gs muired or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. In witness Whereof. the said Fidelity and Guaranty 6uurance Underwriters, lua has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal. duly sttuested by the signatures of its Vice President and Assistant Secretary, this 13 th day of February . A.D.199 8 . Fidelity and Guaranty Iamraaee Underwriters., t t1Ep (Signed) By ......... � �.4: � :......... ............... ...... 19�1 i/ Vim President (Signed) Byr .- ..C.1.:[�--Semetary _......._ O State of Maryland) Baltimore Cur ► On this 13th day of February . AD.19 before me perso r �aryA. Wilson. Vi President of Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., and Thomas E Ruibregme. Assistant S said Company, whom I am utted, who being by me severally duly sworn, said that they. the said Gary A Wilson and Thomas were lice President a Secretary of the said Fidelity and Guaranty hattranee Underwrkers. lac. the corporation and which �ng Power drat they each into r the seal of said mrporaaorc that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was ate seal, that it by order of" Oirectorand that s of said corporation. at they signed their names thereto by like order as Vice President and Secretary, of the Company. GV My Commission expires the 1st day us t A D This Power of A=mey is granted under sgtta a�uttionty of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the Fidafty and Guaranty Imarance Dade. vid rs. ihsc. September 24.1992: Rasahed, that in eoratection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company. all bads, sn>dertal, n , conu = and otter kuhnarerrts relating to said business may be signed. executed. and admowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorney(sHn-ftct pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in accordance with these resoludans. Said PowerW of Attomey for and an behalf of the Company may and shalt be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company. htdtet by the Chairman. or the President. or an Executive Vice President or a Senior Vice Presidernt, or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President. jarrtly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under #city respective designations. The sirmture of such officers may be engraved. printed or lithographed. The agnaorre of each of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating t areto appointing Attomey(sHn -fact for purposes arty of executing and attesting bonds and undrrtakinp and other writings obligatory m the nauae thereof. and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or cerafrcam bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seat doll be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so weaned and certified by such barsimite signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bad or sudataking to which it is validly attached. Resoled. That Attome*)4ri-hct shall have the power and authority and, in any ram subject to the #tenths and limitations elf the Power of Atmmey issued to ahem. m am art deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the teal of the Company to any and all bads and taderLsldrgs and other writings ftfigatory in the nave thereof, and any such instrr== executed by such AtmmeAs► m Fact shalt be as binding upon the Company as if signed by an Fseartive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company. 1. Thomas E Htribregtse. an Assistant Secretary of the Fidelity and Guaranty Insuraace Underwriters, Inc. loci hereby certify that the foTgoing are true excerpts from the Resolutions of the said Comparry as adopted by its Board of Directors an September 24.1992 and that these Resdutio s are in full face and effect. 1. the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the Fidelity and Guaranty huurance Underwriters. Inc. do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. In Testimony Whereof I havejTrermto set my Iharg and the seal of the Fidelity and Gwramy Irrsarattcs Underwriters. list. onfts 1st day of hPrill '19 ti Assistant Secretary FS BUMM) F No Text APR-07-98 TUE u :53 AM PHARR & COMPANY FAX NO. 8067635843 P.04 r x STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE s (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba Pharr & Company KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and yidPlit-y and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of 9800, 481. 00 Dollars ($ 800 , 481- 09 lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered Into a certain written contract with the Obligee. dated the 2ttday of fa" MArr•h 199$ to Rid if9AQ14—LPQ Office Renovations at 1301 Bray and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 1st day of _Apri 1 .19 98 . Pharr Construction Co., Inc. dba and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Surety By. (Title)StaCi Gross Attorney —in —Fact F (Title) By: (Title) APR-07-98 TUE 11:53 AN PHARR & COMPANY FAX NO, 8067635843 P. 05 The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates AIM mac' A93r-yan agent resident In Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. Surety L"'A " k .B , Staci Gross (Title) Attorney -in -Fact Approved as to Form City of�Lubbock p By: ',"%4 City Attorney Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 No Text A CORD ., �lL�i �wi ■� E _ E 9) 03 31 8 m RooucER THIS CERTIFICATE IS tS AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY ANp CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE �fOE SCHOENIG AGENCY HbLDER THIS CERTIFICATE GOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDEp BY THE POLICIES BELOW. /402 UNIVERSITY AVE COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE LUBBOCK, TX 79423 COMPANY AX (806)748-1468 A TRUCK INSURANCE EXCHANGE 'URED COMPANY PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY, INC. B MID-CENTURY INSURANCE COMPANY DBA PHARR AND COMPANY P.O. BOX 2791 COMPANY C LUBBOCK, TX 79403 COMPANY p �Y&RAtE6 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, r EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAD CLAMS. .t TYPE or NSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATIOM LSSTS DATE ODAMDNY) 12ATE(11DWDDIM GENERAL LUIBLLITY GENERAL AGGREGATE s2,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS - COMPAP AGO s2,000,000 CLAMS MADE Fx—1 OCCUR PERSONILL a AM INJURY S1,000,000 A OwNEn a cONTRACToRS PROT 7130 14 02 0 7- 31- 9 7 0 7- 31- 9 8 EACH OCCURRENCE $1, 0 0 0, 0 0 0 !� FIRE DALtAOE("weAre) $ 50,000 MED EXP (Ar7 om person) S 5,000 I. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY X ANYAUTo COMBINED SINGLE LIMB S 1,000,000 rr ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per Pa—) : A X HIREDAUTos X NON-OWNEDAUTOS 7130 14 03 07-31-97 07-31-98 BODILY INJURY (Perecdaen) = PROPERTY DAMAGE S WMOEUIBILITY ANYAUTO AUTO ONLY -EA ACCIDENT i OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: EACHACGDENT S AGGREGATE S r" EXC'E EACH OCCURRENCE s2,000,000 X UMBRELLA FORM 7130 14 05 07-31-97 07-31-98 AGGREGATE s2,000,000 S OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM WORIMSCOMPENSATON AND EMRS' PLOYEUABILITY X A LL TORY IMIT R EL EACH ACCIDENT $ 1, 0 0 0, 0 0 0 i THE PROPRIETOR/ INct. PARTNERSIF.XECUTNE g N2307 46 85 07-31-97 07-31-98 EL DISEASE POLICY LIMIT $1, 000, 000 EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE S 1 , 0 0 0 , 0 0 0 OFFICERS ARE: EXCL P" OTHER BUILDERS RISK 7130 14 06 07-31-97 07-31-98 CONTRACT AMOUNT A BCRIPTION OF OPERATN)NSILOCATNk18NEMLEMPECM,L REVS ,rob: L.P. & L. Renovation CERTIFICATE HOLDER IS LISTED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED WITH A WAVIER OF -GUBROGATION y��/yp��{ ��pp�err _moo - 'Apr dMElE City of Lubbock r� SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE 183UNO COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL P . 0. Box 2000 .30-- DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, Lubbock, Texas BUT FAILURE TO MALL SUCH NOTICE BIIALL SIIPOBE NO OBUMATWM OR UABNLRY ., ATTN: Ron Shuffield OF ANY IWO UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATNEB AUTHORMDREPRESENTATNE _.I _ -- - ASAD-00l3P:QRAi�['f�8 -� i CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Appropriate Insurance AgentlBroker Prior to Award of Contract 1, the undersigned Agent/Broker, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Contractor. If the below identified Contractor is awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by contractor, furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. Agent (Signature) Agent (Print) r Name of AgentlBroker: t Address of Agent/Broker: City/State/Zip: Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( ) Date: ! CONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: NOTE TO AGENTIBROKER If this time requirement is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806)775-2165. BID 098034 - LP&L OFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BROADWAY 7 F F r CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a. new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: F r REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE 'The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering # equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. �.-. � L�.. _ 1_____� _ �[-.�. � �__ �- __.. �.... i._ __ _ t _ _ i _ � _ i _ � - _ t - _ - � � � FCONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK F F r F F 0 F THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 2e day of March,1998 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through Windy Sitton, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Pharr & Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State f Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. WITNESSETH: That for and In consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith Of any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID 998034 - LP&L QJFFICE RENOVATIONS AT 1301 BR AD�J�Y - E8j�0�481.00 0 �� 1 d- C i� Y and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, Insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided In the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement In Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: Secr�Pjy R�OVED A TO CONTENT: 40wnR661pta entative APPROVED AS TO FORM: City Attorney ATTEST: Co rate Secretary CONTRACTOR: PHAR OMPANY By: PRINTED NAME: _J) j> my TITLE: &XS I bin r COMPLETE ADDRESS: Pharr & Company PO Box 2791 Lubbock, TX 79408 F No Text GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT L1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit PHARR & COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced In this contract, or their legal representative. l 3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative Is used In this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or Inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or Inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 74. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (f required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for Inspection In accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract' or "contract documents'. F5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required; "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed; or words of like Import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved; "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like Import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, Includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served If delivered in person to the Individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is Intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 7 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, Insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, If required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owners Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractors layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractors request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owners Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work Is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owners Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owners Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owners Representative will not be responsible for the Contractors failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owners Representative whenever Owners Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owners Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owners Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owners Representative at Contractors expense. 2 F r 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is fumished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the worT( and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and 4 location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms r or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all i modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor _ shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without -- approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. in the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. F i Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost' is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age F Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owners Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on.account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification _. obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. -- 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. F 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the �... Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. t 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional Insured, or in the alternative, t shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof f" of coverage Insurance documents Including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $100,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: rPremises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard t'" Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $100,000.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0.0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has 8 F F r i undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractors current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; 9 (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of, coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. -- 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. 10 F F A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 7 t; 11 REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation Insurance. This Includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the —, project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive Information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to. provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, t0: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self-insurance Regulation. _ Providing false or misleading Information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; r- (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; 12 I: vi retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project O q 9 P 1 and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (I)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the f Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless ` against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION t The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. r.., Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the ±~ contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 13 ei 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in _ this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $750.00 (SEVEN HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. 14 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION r- I It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owners Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the l construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. 7 The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owners Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owners Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owners Representative within twenty (20) calendar days, of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owners Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed. Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owners convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owners Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 15 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the fumishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine -` the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work _ performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 16 r F 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. r 17 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final. and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative; when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no -- further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment,,tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which 18 r would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. t In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work Is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, �- and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at 6 - either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the.jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in r paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY F The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 19 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. — 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. -� 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to — direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owners Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractors performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractors own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. -- 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in ^ any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owners Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least ._ twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper — performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 20 No Text Resolution No. 5121 March 14, 1996 Item #19 i; WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of i per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public `i works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's ji Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and { ` WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 1 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984, and further updated by i Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8. 1987; and I WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: i THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be I as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made i a part hereof for all intents and purposes: Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades i Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction i Exhibit C. Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Weekend and Holiday Rate I Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and i such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided by law. I F Passed by the City Council this 14th ATTEST: r— a ftvvn� Betty M. Minson, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: .--;V6W a4e�' Mary AndrWws, Managing Director of Human Resources APPROVED AS TO FORM: a old Willard, Assistant City Attorney HW :da/ccdocs/pubworks. res February 14, 1996 2 F F EXIIIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 10.00 Air Conditioner Installer 11.00 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 5.50 Asbestos Worker 8.00 Asbestos Supervisor 11.00 Bricklayer 11.00 Bricklayer -Helper 6.00 Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter -Helper 6.00 Cement F'uusher 7.50 Drywall Hanger 10.00 Electrician 13.00 Electrician -Helper 6.00 Equipment Operator -Heavy 8.50 Equipment Operator -Light 7.50 Floor Installer 8.50 Glazier 8.00 Insulator-Piping/Boiler 9.00 Insulator -Helper 5.50 Iron Worker 8.00 Laborer -General 5.50 Mortar Mixer 5.50 Painter 9.50 Plumber 10.50 Plumber -Helper 6.00 Roofer 8.00 Roofer -Helper 5.50 Sheet Metal Worker 8.75 Sheet Metal Worker Helper 5.50 Welder -Certified 10.00 Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hgpry Rate Asphalt Heaterman 6.00 Asphalt Shoveler 5.50 Concrete Finisher 7.35 Concrete Finisher -Helper 5.75 Electrician 10.50 Flagger 5.50 Form Setter 6.50 Form Setter -Helper 5.50 Laborer -General 5.50 Laborer -Utility 6.25 Mechanic 7.25 Mechanic -Helper 5.50 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.00 Bulldozer 7.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.00 Front End Loader 6.50 Heavy Equipment Operator 7.00 Light Equipment Operator 6.50 Motor Grader Operator 8.50 Roller 6.00 Scraper 6.50 Tractor 6.50 Truck Driver -Light 6.00 Truck Driver -Heavy 6.50 r. EI�HIBIT C r I Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime ('in excess of forty hours per week) is 1 1/2 times base rate. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates _ Weekend and Holiday Rate The rate for weekend and holiday is 1 1/2 times base rate. }} _l f r r r , r I s No Text TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX LUBBOCK POWER & LIGHT OFFICE RENOVATION i 1301 BROADWAY, LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401- CITY OF LUBBOCK PROJECT NUMBER: 213-9354 w V,sr.:❑,U' n' INDEX �._ �' � �;��'_.. .�' 10 Section Number Section Title Index DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01010 Special Conditions '�3.� 01030 Alternates 01045 Cutting And Patching 01050 Final Cleaning DIVISION 2 SITEWORK Section 02071 Selective Demolition 02514 Concrete Curbs, Walks And Paving DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 03300 Concrete Work DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS Section 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND.PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 06402 Interior Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07120 Building Insulation 07900 Caulking And Sealants DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS Section 08114 Custom Steel Doors And Frames 08211 Flush Wood Doors 08410 Aluminum Entrances And Storefronts 08710 Finish Hardware 08800 Glass And Glazing DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09300 Tile 09511 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09521 Acoustical Wall Panels 09650 Resilient Flooring 09680 Carpet 09900 Painting 09950 Wall Coverings DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 10155 Toilet Compartments 10425 Specialty Signs 10800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT - Omitted DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 12511 Horizontal Louver Blinds DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - Omitted DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS - Omitted Pages 3 5 3 4 2 5 3 8 6 5 3 7 3 2 4 4 6 7 5 9 4 5 3 4 4 9 3 3 3 4 3 Index - 1 AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. DIVISION 15 PROJECT NUMBER 97120 MECHANICAL LP & L BUILDING RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 15200 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 15210 PLUMBING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 15230 CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 15235 HEATING WATER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 15260 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 15290 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 15320 AIR DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 15330 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 15400 INSULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 15500 EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 15600 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS . . . 1-2 15700 TEMPERATURE REGULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 DWAYNE R. AGNEW AGNEW ASSOCIATES, INC. DIVISION 16 PROJECT NUMBER 97120 ELECTRICAL LP & L BUILDING RENOVATION TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION TITLE PAGE 16000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 16060 MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING . . . . . . . . . 1-3 16110 RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 16120 CONDUCTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 16140 WIRING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 16180 EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 16441 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 16450 GROUNDING AND BONDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 16470 PANELBOARDS . . . . . . 1-4 16475 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES . . . 1-4 16495 TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 16500 LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 16620 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13 +"�E OF T�l1 S / EkIfRtB'AT i e ; SECTION 01010 - SPECIAL CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project consists of: Renovation of Existing Facilities. 1. City of Lubbock Project Number: 213 - 9354 2. Project Location: 1301 Broadway, Lubbock, Texas 79401 3. Owner: Lubbock Power & Light B. Contract Documents, dated January 31, 1998 were prepared for the Project by: 1. Stiles & Stiles, Architects 3307 Avenue X, Lubbock, Texas 79411 Voice (806) 795 - 6431 Fax (806) 797 - 1013 2. Agnew Associates, Inc. Consulting Engineers 3223 South Loop 289, Suite 424, Lubbock, Texas 79423 Voice (806) 799 - 0753 Fax (806) 799 - 2014 C. The Contractor shall supply all labor, materials, transportation, apparatus, light, energy, scaffolding and tools necessary for the entire proper and substantial completion of the work and shall install, maintain and remove all equipment of construction and other utensils or things and be responsible for the safe, proper and lawful construction maintenance and use of same, and shall construct in the best and most workmanlike manner these improvements and everything properly incidental thereto, as shown on Drawings, stated in Specifications or reasonably implied therefrom or in accordance with the Contract Documents. D. The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.3 WORK SEQUENCE AND TIME OF COMPLETION A. Adherence to the Work Sequence and Time of Completion shall be a strict condition of this Contract. 1. Work on all areas of the project shall begin with a "Notice To Proceed" issued by The City of Lubbock. 2. The Contractor shall be given 66 consecutive calendar days from the issuance of the "Notice To Proceed" to complete all work for the First Floor Level and Computer Room B07 in the Basement Level. a. The relocation of all modular furniture systems, loose equipment and miscellaneous items shall be the responsibility of Lubbock Power & Light. b. Work on all other areas of the project shall proceed uninterrupted during the Lubbock Power & Light moving operations. 1 3. Time of completion for the total project shall be 178 consecutive calendar days as set forth in the "Notice To Proceed". 4. A "Certificate Of Substantial Completion" shall be issued for each area of the project as they are accepted by the Owner. 01010 - 1 5. A specific sequence of work and acceptance of the work shall be agreed to by the Owner, Contractor and Architect prior to the start of the work. Any deviation or modification proposed by the Contractor to the accepted sequence of work shall be submitted in writing to the Owner and Architect for approval. 1.4 WORK BY THE OWNER AND WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. Separate Contract: The Owner may award separate contracts for performance of certain construction operations at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract. B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. C. Asbestos Abatement: Certain areas of the existing facilities have been identified'to contain 'asbestos. All asbestos abatement will be conducted by the Owner. 1. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with any asbestos abatement operations. 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is •� indicated. 1. Owner Occupancy: The Owner shall occupy numerous spaces immediately adjacent to the areas indicated to receive new construction. _ 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner, the Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on -site. B. Existing Building: Protect existing building from damage throughout the construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Take all precautions necessary to protect the building and its occupants during the construction period. 1.6 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the site and portions of the existing building during the entire construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and -- facilitate owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owner's operations. 1.7 EXAMINATION OF SITE A. Bidders are required to visit the site and each space within the existing building and compare the drawings and specifications with existing conditions, and inform themselves of all conditions which will affect this work. Failure of the successful bidder to do so will in no way relieve the bidder from the necessity of furnishing any materials, labor, or equipment, or performing any work that may be required to complete work in accordance with drawings and specifications, without additional cost to the Owner. 1.8 NOTIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall give the Architect verbal notification at least 48 .� hours prior to commencing any of the following: 1. Concrete Pour r 4 2. Steel Erection 3. Masonry Work 4. Painting 5. Testing Various Utility Lines ij 1.9 CONSTRUCTION FENCES A. The Contractor shall construct and maintain protective temporary fences around areas of the project that he deems necessary for the proper completion of the work or storage of on site materials. B. Temporary fences shall be constructed of standard gauge chain link mesh. Fences shall be 6'-0" high, with steel or aluminum posts spaced as necessary to maintain fences in good repair. PIS C. Upon completion of the project, the storage and access areas shall be restored to pre -construction condition. Grassed areas shall be fine graded ' to remove any evidence of vehicular traffic. Damaged irrigation components shall be restored to pre -construction conditions. t 1.10 PROTECTION AND ACCESS A. The Contractor shall adequately protect the property and adjacent property r at all times, and shall make good at his own expense any damage to such d property arising out of any operation connected with his contract. i B. The Contractor shall at all times protect the excavations, trenches, and/or r the building from damage from rain water, spring water, ground water, i backing up of drains or sewers, and all other water. He shall provide pumps and equipment and enclosures to provide this protection. C. The Contractor shall at all times provide protection against weather - rain, wind, storms, frost, or heat so as to maintain all work, materials, 111 apparatus and fixtures from injury or damage. At the end of the day's work all new or old work likely to be damaged shall be protected. ! 1.11 SITE WORK A. The Contractor shall not commence work on concrete sidewalks, entrance r! slabs, and parking areas until work requiring heavy trucks or equipment is completed. 1.12' REPAIR OF DAMAGE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage caused by him, his workmen, or his subcontractors to the work or materials, to tools, and equipment of one another, to adjacent property and persons, and shall make good any loss, damage or injury without cost to the Owner. 1.13 EXISTING UNDERGROUND UTILITIES A. Existing underground lines may occur in the site where the work is to be done. Such lines will be staked by the Contractor prior to start of the work. 1.14 COORDINATION A. All contractors and subcontractors on the project shall coordinate their work with each other, advising on work schedules, equipment locations, etc. B. Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors shall coordinate routes of piping, ductwork, etc., with each other prior to start of installation. 1�» 1.15 FIELD ENGINEERING 1. A. Laying Out Work: A competent foreman or superintendent initially approved by the Architect, shall be kept by the Contractor at the construction site 01010 - 3 k at all times and in continuous superintendence during the progress of the work, to receive instructions and to act for the Contractor in the accurate laying out and direction of all work. 1.16 PERMITS AND LAWS A. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State and Municipal Laws, Codes and Ordinances applicable to the work of this contract, and he shall also comply with all regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters having jurisdiction, and he shall obtain and pay for all permits required in connection with the execution of his work. The Architect shall be furnished with certified copies of these permits if requested. B. If the above Laws, Codes or Ordinances conflict with the Contract Documents, then the -laws, codes or ordinances shall govern instead of the documents, except in such cases where the documents exceed them in quality of materials, or labor; then the documents shall be followed. 1.17 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Preconstruction Conference: Prior to the Contractor beginning work at the site, the Architect will hold a preconstruction conference at a time and place to be established by the Architect. B. Project Briefings: Each month, the Contractor shall brief the Owner and Architect on project progress during the preceding period. Any slippage in schedule shall be discussed during the briefings. 1. Briefings shall be held at a time and place established by the Architect. 1.18 TEMPORARY UTILITIES AND FACILITIES A. The Contractor will be allowed to use existing power and water available at the site for construction purposes without charge. B. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary lighting as needed in the building for all trades. C. Job Office: Contractor shall maintain a job office and storage facilities as may be necessary for the proper execution of the work. D. Telephone: Contractor shall be responsible for his own telephone: The Contractor shall provide and pay for a telephone at the building site in —. order to expedite his work. Local telephone service shall be made available to all persons connected with the work. Use of Owner's telephone is prohibited. E. Toilets: The Contractor shall provide and maintain in good order temporary toilets on the site. Toilet shall be an approved chemical type. Toilets shall be completely enclosed and of neat appearance. Toilet locations shall be approved by the Architect. Use of Owner's toilets is prohibited. F. Temporary Heat and Ventilation: Provide temporary heat and ventilation as required to maintain adequate environmental conditions to facilitate progress of the Work, to meet specified minimum conditions for the installation of materials, and to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity. G. Cover trenches and holes when not in use. Erect barriers at changes in plane steeper than 45 degrees and more than 3 feet in height. H. Provide facilities to exclude unauthorized visitors from the construction site. Provide personal safety equipment for authorized visitors. Provide .-. temporary doors with locks where required. I. Provide and maintain warning lights and signs as necessary to prevent damage 01010 - 4 ?0. ior injury. Keep warning lights burning from dusk to dawn. 1.19 TEMPORARY CONTROL OF WEEDS AND OTHER MATERIALS A. Weed Control: The Contractor shall keep the streets and construction area free of weeds. Weeds shall be kept to a height of no more than 12 inches to comply with the City Ordinances. 1.20 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove all combustible and non-combustible waste materials completely from the Owner's property and legally dispose of same. B. Burning of any materials will not be permitted within the boundaries of the Owner's property. 1.21 DAILY SITE CLEANUP A. The Contractor shall, on a daily basis, have all loose, discarded, material debris and packaging materials picked up and placed in,a proper trash receptacle for removal from the site. B. The interior space shall have all construction debris picked up and held in designated area so as not to interfere with daily work progress. 1.22 FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION A. The Contractor, subcontractors, and their personnel are required to be in compliance with the fire protection and prevention requirements of the Occupational Safety and health Act for Construction. Fire extinguishers shall be available at all times while work is being performed. The number and type are to be as specified in Subpart F of OSHA. The Contractor is required to furnish his own extinguishers. B. Waste combustible materials shall not be allowed to accumulate at the work site and shall be removed from the site and disposed on a regular basis. 1.23 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENT A. Signs: No signs or advertisements will be permitted without approval of the Architect. 1.24 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. Storage And Protection: The Contractor shall carefully consider material storage, so as to avoid interference with other phases of construction. B. He shall so store, pile and arrange his materials that they will not be injured by the elements, by the progress of erection, by contact with the ground or from any other cause. He shall provide and do all covering necessary for this purpose and shall remove from the premises any damaged materials when so directed by the Architect. C. The Owner will designate an area immediately adjacent to the Building site for storage of materials. Storage area shall be fenced to keep unauthorized persons from having access to area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION FEND OF SECTION 01010 01010 - 5 FSECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that Work into the Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract. D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates" is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each alternate. E. The Alternates will be considered by the Owner and may, or may not, be accepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable). PART 3 - EXECUTION 01030 1 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be DEDUCTED from the Base Bid if ALL WORK in connection with the Annex Building First Floor Level is DELETED as part of this contract. B. Alternate No. 2: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be DEDUCTED from the Base Bid if ALL WORK for the following areas of the Basement Level are DELETED as part of this contract: 1. Elevator Lobby B01. 2. Entry Area B02. 3. -Meeting Room B03. 4. Closet B04. 5. Corridor B05. 6. Storage Vault B06. a. For clarification, this Alternate shall NOT 'deleted any work indicated for Computer Room B07. b. For clarification, this Alternate shall NOT deleted work indicated for Mechanical Room B08 and mechanical equipment serving the First Floor Level. However, the mechanical equipment serving Meet Room B03 is to be deleted. C. For clarification, this Alternate shall NOT deleted work indicated for the Fire Alarm System. C. Alternate No. 3: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump'sum amount to be DEDUCTED from the Base Bid if ALL WORK for the Standby Engine Generator System is DELETED as part of this contract. M D. Alternate No. 4: The Bidder shall state on the Proposal form the lump sum amount to be DEDUCTED from the Base Bid if ALL work for the following items or areas is DELETED as part of this contract: 1. Delete all new carpet and new modular carpet tile from the First Floor Level except for the areas where the existing quarry tile and adjacent .carpet border is indicated to be removed. a. For clarification, all the existing quarry tile and the solid blue carpet border shall be removed as indicated in Work Area 104, ^ Customer Service Area 126, Lobby 127, Customer Service Lobby 128, Elevator Lobby 129 and Work Area 139. New carpet (not modular carpet tile) as specified shall be installed only in the areas where the existing quarry tile and adjacent carpet border has been removed. To the extent possible, the new carpet shall match the existing carpet. b. For clarification, no modular carpet tile shall be required for any space on the First Floor Level under this alternate. 2. Delete all millwork (cabinets, shelving, etc.) items on the Second Floor Level except in Utility Room 208, Men's Toilet 238, women's Toilet 239 and Utility Room 227. a. For clarification, millwork items shall be deleted from Reception 201, Copy Room 211, Library 212, Office 218, Work Area 224, Work Area 228, Work Area 229 and Waiting Area 234. b. For clarification, wall areas behind deleted millwork items shall receive new finishes as indicated on the Room Finish Schedule. 01030 - 2 3. Delete all work indicated for the Existing West Parking Lot and the Existing South Parking Lot. a. For clarification, this alternate shall not delete the requirement to provide areas of new concrete walks at the new doors installed at the North East Corner of the Existing Building First Floor Level. END OF SECTION 01030 01030 - 3 FSECTION 01045 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 02071 Selective Demolition. 2. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Division 15 & 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of the time cutting and patching will be performed if the Owner requires approval of these procedures before proceeding. Request approval to proceed. Include the following information, as applicable, in the proposal: 1. Describe the extent' of cutting and patching required. Show how it will be performed and indicate why it cannot be avoided. 2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work. 4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out -of -service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. 7. Approval by the Architect to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the Architect's right to later require complete removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that would change their load -carrying capacity or load - deflection ratio. 1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following structural elements: 01045 - 1 f a. Structural concrete. b. Structural steel. C. Lintels. d. Structural decking. e. Miscellaneous structural metals. f. Equipment supports. g. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or _. decreased operational life or safety. 1. Obtain approval of the.cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Air or smoke barriers. C. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. d. Membranes and flashings. e. Fire protection systems. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Electrical wiring systems. C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. �. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use .� materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existingmaterials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching is to be performed before cutting. If unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding. 1. Before proceeding, meet at the Project Site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. 01045 - 2 B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. r } 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review t proposed procedures with the original Installer; comply with the original Installer's recommendations. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum r disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a Carborundum saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 2 Sections where cutting and patching requires excavating and backfilling. 5. Where services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, by- pass utility services, such as pipe or conduit, before cutting. Cut- off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal the remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after by-passing and !- cutting. C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. �+ Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. 3. Where removing walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the area has received primer and second coat. 01045 - 3 4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. END OF SECTION 01045 01045 - 4 F FSECTION 01050 - FINAL CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall use experienced workmen or professional cleaners for final cleaning. B. Upon completion of all work, and just before request for final inspection, the Contractor shall have all construction areas or spaces cleaned and in such condition that the Owner will have no further cleaning requirements. C. Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Division 2 through Division 16. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations. D. The following are examples, but not limitations of cleaning levels required: 1. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 2. Clean transparent materials, including windows and transom glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticeable as vision -obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials. 3. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard -surfaced finishes, to a dirt - free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition. 4. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean and remove excess lubrication and other substances. 5. Remove debris and surface dust from limited -access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment wells, attics and similar spaces. 6. Clean concrete floors in non -occupied spaces broom clean. 7. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. 8. Wax and polish resilient tile and similar floor surfaces. 9. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure. 10. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. 1.3 SITE (YARDS AND GROUNDS) CLEANING: A. Sweep and remove stains from exterior walks, porches and paved areas. Also r remove temporary tape, wrappings, coatings, labels, grease, dust, dirt, p stains, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from exterior items and t surfaces caused by new construction operations. B. Clean project site (lawns and grounds), including landscape development i areas, of all debris and foreign substances. Rake grounds which are neither t planted nor paved, to a smooth, even -textured surface. Remove excess fill and fine grade around all new site utility construction. Repair all areas damaged by vehicle traffic or other construction operations. f C. Prior to final inspection of each building, the Contractor shall edge all concrete walks, drives and curbs and mow all lawn areas associated with said building. This work shall include the sweeping and removal of all lawn clippings, excess dirt, etc. 01050 - 1 1.4 RUBBISH A. All debris, surplus material, and other items specified or indicated for removal and not claimed by the Owner as salvaged materials shall become property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a lawful manner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 01050 01050 - 2 F FSECTION 02071 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The extent of Selective Demolition is indicated on the Drawings. B. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following: 1. Portions of building exterior including walls, concrete walks, concrete masonry units, stone and miscellaneous items. 2. Portions of interior masonry partitions, quarry tile flooring, concrete slab, walls, floor coverings and ceilings. 3. Interior partitions, doors, frames and miscellaneous items. C. Items to be salvaged or removed and reinstalled include the following: 1. Interior metal letters and logos. 2. Interior doors, frames, information booth and casework items. 3. Interior fixtures, equipment items, etc. D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 01045 "Cutting and Patching". 2. Division 15 "Mechanical & Plumbing". 3. Division 16 "Electrical". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged, or to remain the Owner's property. B. Remove and Salvage: Items indicated to be removed and salvaged remain the Owner's property. Remove items indicated and protect against damage. Deliver salvaged items to Owner's designated storage area located on the site. C. Remove and Reinstall: Remove items indicated; clean, service, and otherwise prepare them for reuse; store and protect against damage. Reinstall items in the same locations or in locations indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage r.. and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by the Architect, # items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, r, or otherwise indicated to remain the Owner's property, demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. `,. B. Items indicated to remain the Owner's property. Carefully remove and salvage each item in a manner to prevent damage and deliver promptly to the 02071 - 1 Owner. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated. B. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work similar to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before starting selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of the building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so that Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buildings to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.' C. Asbestos: It is not expected that asbestos will be encountered in the Work. 71 If any materials suspected of containing asbestos are encountered, do not disturb the materials. Immediately notify the Architect and the Owner. 1. Asbestos will be removed by Owner before start of Work. D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's on -site operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to 02071 - 2 I determine extent of selective demolition required. B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect. D. Survey the condition of the building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities, except when authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to governing authorities. a. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. B. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utility services. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. B. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area. 1. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction, on exterior surfaces and new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. t C. Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Protect air -handling equipment. D. Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural �. support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of building to be selectively demolished. i F02071 - 3 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. E. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. To minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. On -site storage or sale of removed items is prohibited. 4. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition '- existing before start of selective demolition operations. 3.5 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly patch and repair holes and damaged surfaces caused to adjacent construction by selective demolition operations. B. Patching is specified in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." C. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls to remain with an approved masonry patching material, applied according to manufacturer's printed recommendations. D. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. E. Patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space where demolished walls or partitions extend one finished area into another. Provide a flush and even surface of uniform color and appearance. 1. Closely match texture and finish of existing adjacent surface. 2. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances. 3. Where patching smooth painted surfaces, extend final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch after the surface has received primer and second coat. 4. Inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation, where feasible. F. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even - plane surface of uniform appearance. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on -site. 02071 - 4 rB. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. [ C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 02071 l; r ti. f t . Cr 4 . I r 02071 - 5 I r SECTION 02514 - CONCRETE CURBS, WALKS AND PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of concrete curbs, walks, steps and paving is shown on the Drawings. B. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for materials, testing, mixing, placing and curing, except as herein specified otherwise. 1.3 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Grade Control: Establish and maintain the required lines and grades. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Forms: 1. Either steel or wood, of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. Bent, twisted, split or defective form materials are not permitted. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining, clear, paraffin base form oil that will not discolor or otherwise deface the surface of the concrete. B. Concrete: Comply with applicable requirement of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for concrete materials. Concrete mix shall not be the same as used for building slabs and foundations. Exterior concrete shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days and shall contain six (6) sacks (564 lbs.) of cement per cubic yard of concrete, 6 percent plus or minus 1 r.. percent of entrained air, coarse aggregate 1" or smaller and shall be poured with a slump of 5" plus or minus 111. C. Expansion Joints: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. At curbs and gutters, furnish special section to meet local curb and gutter specifications. PART 3 - EXECUTION ! 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATIONt A. Remove all loose material from the uniformly compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION: A. Set forms to the required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. r` Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Tops of walks and paving shall slope at least 1/8" per foot. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerances: 1. Top of form units: Not more than 1/8" in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4" in 10 feet. C. Clean forms after each use, and coat with form oil as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. 02514 - 1 3.3 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work, for mixing -' and placing concrete, and as herein specified. 2. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subgrade as required to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around — manholes or other structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. 3. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix, and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies or side forms. Use only square -faced shovels for hand -spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Do not over vibrate. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. Remove such sections if directed by the Architect. B. Curbs and Gutters: Automatic machine may be used for curbs and gutter placement at Contractor's option, if acceptable to the Architect. If machine placement is to be used, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results which meet or exceed the minimums herein specified. Machine placement must produce curbs and gutters to the required cross-section, lines, grades, finish and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified. 3.4 JOINTS: A. General: Construct expansion, weakened -plane (contraction), and construction joints true -to -line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise shown. B. Weakened -Plane (Contraction) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness as follows: C. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at the end of all pours and at locations where placement operations are stopped for a period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such pour terminates at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints as shown, or if not shown, use standard metal keyway section forms. E. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks and other fixed objects. 1. Expansion joints shall be at 20-feet o.c., unless otherwise shown. 2. Extend joint fillers full -width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2" or more than 1" below finished surface. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete. 3. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are placed. -- 02514 - 2 �I 3.5 CONCRETE FINISHING: A. Finishes: Unless indicated otherwise, items of concrete to be finished as follows: 1. All sidewalks, steps, concrete aprons and porches shall have float finish, brushed as directed to provide non -slip finish. 2. Curbs, gutters and driveway approaches shall be finished with a r.. stiff -bristled broom to provide non -slip finish. Provide sample for approval. B. The following finishing procedures shall be observed: 1. After striking -off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Do not use "jitterbugs". Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform mixture. 2. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. 3. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to 1/2" radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate any tool marks on concrete surface. 4. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared complete surface finishing as follows: a. Broom Finish: Broom finish, by drawing a fine broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a fine line texture acceptable to the Architect. b. On inclining slab surfaces, provide a coarse, non -slip finish by scoring surface with a stiff -bristled broom. { 3.6 CURING: A. Protect and cure finished concrete walks, steps, curbs and gutters and paving, complying with the applicable requirements of Section 03300, Concrete Work. Use moist -curing methods whenever possible for first 24 hours, then r apply curing compound. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS: t A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with polysulphide-epoxy binder, or with polysulphide resin grout, complying with FS MMM-G-650B CANC. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains rand spillage of materials as they occur. ` D. Sweep concrete pavement and walks free of stains, discolorations, dirt and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. rr f END OF SECTION 02514 7 02514 - 3 SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. The extent of concrete work is shown on the Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 2. ACI 3 3. ACI 311 4. ACI 316 5. ACI 347 6. MSP-1-90 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection". "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork". Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of Standard Practice". B. Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements, including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient concrete as directed by the Architect. C. Design and Testing: 1. The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with all information being reported to the Architect. A proven, established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used. Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports for the proposed mix. 2. Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Architect so directs. The Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and handling including breaking of same at laboratory. 3. The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory designated by the Architect and the Owner. 4. All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Owner. 5. Test results shall be furnished to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor. 6. Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be replaced with new as directed by Architect. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, t including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems and others as requested by the Architect. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of �, 03300 - 1 I Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS: A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces with plywood, metal, metalframed plywood -faced or other acceptable panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest — practicable sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or "good -as -new 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS: A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Supports for Reinforcement: 1. Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified. Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable. 2. For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS: A. Portland Cement: 1. ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 2. Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Fine Aggregate: 1. Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other deleterious substances. 2._ Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable. C. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows: 1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone. 2. Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run gravel is not permitted. 3. Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete. 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: a. Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing, bars or bundles or bars. b. These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the Architect, workability and methods of consolidation are such that concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids. D. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable. E. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 03300 - 2 0 F. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more than 0.1% chloride ions. G. Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows: 1. Type B, Retarding. 2. Type C, Accelerating. 3. Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding. 4. Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating. H. Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless otherwise authorized in writing by Architect. 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS: A. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth of slab. B. Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections. C. Membrane -Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to the Architect. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES: A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. B. Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1. 2.6 ADMIXTURES: A. Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F. B. Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement having air content within the following limits: 1. 5.5% with 1 1/2" maximum aggregate 2. 6.0% with 1" maximum aggregate 3. 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate trr 4. 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate t C, Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict compliance with the manufacturer's directions. D. Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality control. 2.7 SLUMP LIMITS: A. Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the point of placement as follows: 1. Ramps and Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 3". 2. Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than 3". F03300 - 3 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING: A. Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, and as herein specified. B. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will not be permitted. C. During hot weather, or under conditions contributingto rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required. D. When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1-1 hours to 75 minutes, and when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F., reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS: A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Forms shall not leak cement paste. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCING: A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2 beyond the last leg of continuous bar supports. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads. 3.3 JOINTS: A. Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: 1. Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or patterns as shown or directed. 03300 4 r 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT: A. General: 1. Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified. 2. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. 3. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. B. Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not used. C. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete placement operations. D. Hot Weather Placing: 1. When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form thoroughly before placing concrete. 4. Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 3.5 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES: A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic roofing, and as C shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 1. After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or �+ inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope 03300 - 5 surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. 2. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. C. Non -Slip Broom Finish: 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps and ramps, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules. 2. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect before application. 3.6 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION: A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperature, and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by moist curing or by moisture retaining cover curing or by membrane -forming curing compound and by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. — Continuous water -fog spray. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture -cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture -retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends - lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing compound for slabs as follows: a. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). b. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power -spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repairing damage during curing 03300 - 6 I period. c. Do not apply membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring, painting, and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are t. removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. l D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Initially cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces by moist curing. r 1. Final cure unformed surfaces, unless otherwise specified, by methods }� specified above, as applicable. 2. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture -retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. E. Apply curing and hardening compound finish to all interior concrete floors where shown on the Drawings. Apply curing and hardening compound after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Apply in strict accord with the manufacturer's instructions in two coats. Evenly apply each coat, and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. 3.7 REMOVAL OF FORMS: A. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. 3.8 RE -USE OF FORMS: A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work. Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form. facing material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are intended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as acceptable to Architect. 3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS: A. Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left ip concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. 3.10 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION: A. All expense for the taking and testing of concrete cylinders shall be borne by the Owner. CB. Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of concrete may include the following, as directed by the Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test specimens taken at point of discharge. F03300 - 7 3. Air Content: ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for each set of compressive strength test specimens. 4. Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40 degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each time a set of compression test specimens made. 5. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required. C. Test results will be reported in writing to the Architect, Engineer and the Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by the Architect. The testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when. unacceptable concrete is verified. END OF SECTION 03300 03300 - 8 F SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Repairs to existing concrete unit masonry walls. 2. Repairs to existing field stone veneers. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not install until they are in an air-dried condition. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt on completed masonry. B. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Cold -Weather Construction: Do not lay masonry units until air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried out. C. Hot -Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind breaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and above. 04200 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows for each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control _. joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged units for outside corners, except where indicated as bullnose. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows: .r 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength indicated below: a. Not less than the unit compressive strengths required to produce concrete unit masonry construction of compressive strength indicated. 2. Weight Classification: Lightweight units unless noted otherwise (less than 105 lbs. per cubic foot). 3. Aggregates: Do not use aggregates made from pumice, scoria, or tuff.. 4. Provide Type I, moisture -controlled units. 5. Size: Manufacturer's standard units 15-5/8" x 7-5/8" x width to match existing walls. 6. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless ._ -otherwise indicated. 2.2 FIELD STONE ~ A. General: Salvage existing field stone to the extent possible for reuse where new door frames are indicated to be installed in existing exterior walls. B. Field Stone: To match existing. 2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold- _ weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. C. Mortar Cement: U.B.C. Standard No. 21-14. D. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. G. Water: Potable. 2.4 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon -steel wire, coating class as follows: a. ASTM A 153, Class B-2, for exterior and interior walls. B. Description: Welded -wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, 04200 - 2 F with prefabricated corner and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch. 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch. C. For single-wythe masonry, provide type as follows with single prair of side ... rods: 1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. D. For multiwythe masonry, provide type as follows: 1. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c. a. Number of Side Rods for Multiwythe Concrete Masonry: One side rod for each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches in width, plus 1 side rod for each wythe of masonry 4 inches or less in width. b. Provide integral drips on cross rods at cavity walls. 2. Tab design with single pair of side rods and rectangular box -type cross ties spaced not more than 16 inches o.c., with side rods spaced for embedment within each face shell of back-up wythe and ties extended to engage the outer wythe by at least 1-1/2 inches. 1 2.5 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Asphalt -Coated Copper Flashing: Manufacturer's standard product consisting of sheet copper of weight indicated below, coated with flexible asphalt. 1. Weight: 5 oz./sq. ft. 2. Application: As flashing above exterior door frames. 2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of 1/2-cup dry measure tetrasodium polyphosphate and 1/2-cup dry measure laundry detergent dissolved in 1 gal. of water. B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard -strength, general- purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface -acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. 2. For dark -colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface -acting acids and special inhibitors. 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 1. r, 04200 - 3 B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification, for job -mixed mortar; and ASTM C 1142 for ready -mixed mortar, of types indicated below: 1. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 2. For all masonry above or below grade, use type indicated below: a. Type: S. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout. 1. Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2 inches in horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2 inches or more in least horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough -in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness to match existing wall construction. Build single- wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units to match existing masonry units. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. D. Cut masonry units with motor -driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting, where possible. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. 4. Maintain joint widths indicated, except for minor variations required r 04200 - 4 to, maintain bond alignment. If not indicated, lay walls with 3/8-inch joints. B. Lay solid stone units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 1. At cavity walls, slope beds toward cavity to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. As work progresses, trowel mortar fins protruding into cavity flat against cavity face of brick. C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls that are to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTIWYTHE MASONRY A. Use continuous horizontal -joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes. B. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, r_ unless otherwise shown. 1. Provide continuity with horizontal -joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L" units in addition to masonry bonding. C. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: 1. Provide continuity with horizontal -joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units. 3.5 CAVITIES A. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other ,materials during construction. Strike joints facing cavities flush. 1. Use wood strips temporarily placed in cavity to collect mortar droppings. As work progresses, remove strips, clean off mortar droppings, and replace in cavity. B. Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal -joint reinforcing. 3.6 HORIZONTAL -JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal -joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 14 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement in mortar joint 1 block course above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond opening. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by i 04200 - 5 manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick size units and 24 inches for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. 1. Provide prefabricated or built -in -place masonry lintels. Use specially formed bond beam units with reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built -in -place lintels until cured. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point -up joints, including -_ corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for application of sealants. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears prior to tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket and brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Note No. 20 Revised, using the following masonry cleaner: a. Job -mixed detergent solution. b. Proprietary acidic cleaner, applied in compliance with directions _ of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. E. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 04200 6 F F SECTION 05500 — METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems specified elsewhere. B. Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and as specified herein. C. Types of work in this section include metal fabrications for: 1. Rough hardware. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 3. Loose steel lintels. 4. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor details and installation instructions for products used in miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and grout. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and bolt installation by others. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36. C. Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500; or hot rolled, ASTM A 501. D. Structural Steel Sheet: Hot -rolled, ASTM A 570; or cold -rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade required for design loading. E. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, of grade required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated, or if not indicated, G90. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type and grade (if applicable) as selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; black finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated. G. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30. H. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade as selected by fabricator. I. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. J. Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A 27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip galvanized, ASTM A 153. 2.2 GROUT A. Non -Shrink Non -Metallic Grout: Pre -mixed, factory -packaged, non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required. 1 B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A. C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. D. Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92. E. Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111. F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. G. Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325. H. Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and style as required. I. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of work. ' B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise indicated. Form bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing — work. C. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type .. indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat- head (countersunk) screws or bolts. E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use. 05500 2 i r F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to 1 receive finish hardware and similar items. G. Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or specified to be galvanized, as follows: 1. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 2. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier. 3. ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products. H. Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.5 SHOP PAINTING A. Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those which are galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry, unless otherwise indicated, and in compliance with requirements of SSPC-PA1 "paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. B. Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning". 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning". 2.6 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division-6 sections. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers. 2.7 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES: A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of k required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication. 2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS: A. Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise indicated. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS: A. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work. B. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates and steel bars, of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items. r, 05500 - 3 C. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24" o.c. and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4" x 1/4" x 8" steel straps. D. Galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports where indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in -place construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation,- plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. E. Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. F. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, v tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic non -shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non -shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. G. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 05500 - 4 3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05500 05500 - 5 SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood grounds, nailers and blocking. 2. Miscellaneous framing and items for temporary closures, guards, runways and ladders. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of other Sections and generally not exposed, unless otherwise specified. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER, GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. 2.2 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated or scheduled as "Treated Wood" or specified herein to be treated, comply with the applicable requirements of the American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA). Comply with AWPA C2 for lumber and AWPA C9 for plywood. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. B. Pressure treat the following items with water -borne preservatives for above ground use: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing work. 2. Plywood in connection with roofing work, APA, EXT (treated), B-C, of thickness noted on the Drawings. 3. Kiln -dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 15% after treatment with water -borne preservatives. C. Inspect each piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT BLOCKING A. General: Concealed blocking for anchorage of grab bars, casework, etc. shall be fire -retardant -treated wood, pressure impregnate lumber and 06100 - 1 plywood with fire -retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated; identify "fire -retardant -treated wood" with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and '- inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Interior Type A: For interior locations use fire -retardant chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1. No reduction takes place in bending strength, stiffness, and fastener holding capacities below values published by manufacturer of chemical formulation that are based on tests by a qualified independent testing laboratory of treated wood products identical to those indicated for this Project under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions. -- 2. No other form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to manufacture and treatment. 3. No corrosion of metal fasteners results from their contact with treated wood. C. Inspect each piece of treated .lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire - retardant -treated wood products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Interior Type A Fire -Retardant -Treated Wood: a. "Dricon," Hickson Corporation. b. "Pyro-Guard," Hoover Treated Wood Products. C. "Flameproof LHC-HTT," Osmose Wood Preserving Co, Inc. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber as required for temporary support or attachment of construction items, barriers, closures and similar members. B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard" grade light -framing -size lumber of any species or board - size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common" or "Standard" grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or "No. 2 Boards" per SPIB rules. ^^ 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, use with exterior treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153. B. Nails, Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. (ANSI B18.2.3.8M) F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property CIVKIP 7`1 { Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and where indicated, flat I,' washers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. t E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where i opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING, AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement. C. Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. END OF SECTION 06100 F06100 - 3 t SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A. Extent of each type of architectural woodwork is indicated on drawings and include the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim, molding and rails. 2. Architectural casework for transparent finish including hardware. 3. Laminate -clad casework including hardware. 4. Laminate -clad countertops. 5. Shelving for transparent and opaque finish including hardware. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. 3. Section 08800 - Glass And Glazing. 4. Section 09900 - Painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each product and process specified as work of this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication, finishing, and installation. B. Quality Certification: Submit woodwork Manufacturer's (Fabricator's) certification, stating that fabricated woodwork complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated. r C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each item, t. dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details, attachment devices and other components. D. Samples: Submit the following samples: 1. Plastic laminate top with splash, 8" wide x unit length for each type r" of cabinet unit. Provide sample chips for color, pattern and surface finish. 2. Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and finish. �... 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE r i A. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise indicated. B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of architectural woodwork by a firm which can demonstrate successful experience in installing .., architectural woodwork items similar in type and quality to those required for this project. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing architectural r., woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. 06402 - 1 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soilage, and deterioration. ._ B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage, soil, or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Obtain and comply with woodwork fabricator's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork will be within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Verify locations of concealed framing, blocking, reinforcements, and furring that support woodwork by accurate field measurements before being enclosed. Record measurements on final shop drawings. 2. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for 'trimming at site and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated and, where the following products are part of interior woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium -Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2. 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 4. Softwood Plywood: PS 1. 5. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1. B. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high- pressure decorative laminates by one of the following: _ a. Formica Corporation. b. Nevamar Corp. C. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co. 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, except for items specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." 06402 2 B. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule within this Section for 4 cabinet hardware required for all architectural cabinets and shelving. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard and of the following grade: 1. Grade: Custom. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to Project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at the fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on approved shop drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop -cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where t located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges with a water- resistant coating. 2.4 STANDING -AND RUNNING TRIM, MOLDINGS AND RAILS: A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. r B. Rout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of other wide flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. a. C. Interior Trim and Moldings for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Grade: Custom. �., 2. Lumber Species: Red Oak, plain sawn. t D. Interior Trim and Moldings for Opaque Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Grade: Custom. 1 2. Lumber Species: White Pine or Natural Birch. 2.5 ARCHITECTURE CASEWORK (WOOD) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400A requirements for wood cabinets. 1. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: Red Oak, plain sawn. D. Materials for Semi -exposed Surfaces: Wood species and cut to be Woodwork 06402 - 3 fabricator's option. E. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops. 2.6 LAMINATE -CLAD CASEWORK (PLASTIC -COVERED CASEWORK) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400B requirements for laminate - clad cabinets. 1. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other than Tops: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness. 2. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42, 0.042-inch nominal thickness. 3. Vertical Surfaces: GP-30, 0.035-inch nominal thickness. 4. Edges: GP-30, 0.035-inch nominal thickness. D. Materials for Semi -exposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other than Drawer Bodies: Woodwork fabricator's standard low pressure laminate. Color as selected by Architect. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative overlay. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative overlay. E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. F. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers except where located directly under tops. 2.7 PLASTIC -LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400C requirements for countertops. 1. Grade: Custom. B. Type of Top: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: GP-50, 0.050-inch nominal thickness. 2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 4. Core Material: Medium -density particleboard. 06402 - 4 2.8 SHELVING FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH: A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400. B. Shelving: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Shelving Material: Red Oak, plain sawn. 3. Trim and moldings: Red Oak, plain sawn. 2.9 SHELVING FOR OPAQUE FINISH: A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 600. B. Shelving: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Grade: Economy. 2. Shelving Material: Lumber, any closed -grain hardwood listed in referenced woodworking standard with solid hardwood edge banding. 3. Particleboard or fiberboard shall not be accepted. 2.10 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE A. Cabinet Doors: Each door to have 1. 1 Pair Concealed Hinges: Grass 1203 X 613. 2. 1 Each Pull: Stanley 4484 (4 inch long) X 613. B. Cabinet Drawers: Each drawer to have 1. 1 Each Drawer Slide: K&V No.1429 (Heavy Duty). 2. 1 Each Pull: Stanley 4484 (4 inch long) X 613. C. Drawer Locks: Each drawer (only where indicated on drawings) to have 1. 1 Each Drawer Lock: Olympus No.NO78 X 613. 2. Furnish two keys per lock - masterkey not required. D. Adjustable Shelves: 1. Recessed Standards: K&V No.255 BR 2. Supports: K&V No.256 BR 3. Holddown: K&V No.260 BR E. Sliding All Glass Doors: 1. Ball Bearing Track Assembly: K&V No.992. 2. Finish: Dark Bronze. 3. Provide complete assembly with shoes for glass doors and ball bearing carriers. F. Miscellaneous Hardware: Only where indicated on drawings 1. Grommets: Outwater 3" diameter - color as selected. 2. Paper Slots: 12 inches long by 1 3/4" wide by 1" deep; molded -plastic, color as selected. 2.11 CLOSET AND SHELVING HARDWARE: A. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Related Supports: 1. Recessed Standards: K&V No.255 BR 2. Supports: K&V No.256 BR 3. Holddown: K&V No.260 BR B. Closet Hanging Shelf Hardware: 06402 - 5 1. Closet Rod: K&V No.660 (stainless clad) 2. Flange: K&V No.735 (polished chrome) 3. Flange: K&V No.734 (polished chrome) 4. Shelf and Rod Support: K&V No.1195 a. Required only for closets over 4'-6" in length. 2.12 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS: A. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. 1. For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer. B. Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. 1. Provide stainless steel or aluminum nails for exposed exterior woodwork which is to receive transparent finish (if any). Provide any type of non -corrosive nail for other exterior woodwork. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide non-ferrous metal or hot -dip galvanized .-. anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion -resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. — PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 26 or 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 _ inches for plumb and level (including tops); and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 36 inches long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base, if finished. 06402 - 6 1. Install standing and running trim with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line. F. Cabinets and Shelving: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. G. Laminated Plastic Clad Panels: Anchor panels to supporting substrate with concealed panel hanger clips, splined-connection strips, similar associated trim and framing and blind nailing on back-up strips. 1. Do not face -nail. H. Complete the finishing work specified in this Section to the extent not completed at shop or before installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. Apply specified finish coats, including stains and paste fillers if any, to exposed surfaces where only sealer/prime coats were applied in the shop. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch up shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to fabricator and Installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06402 06402 - 7 rrr i \ FSECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL L- 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: �.. 1. Batt insulation for ceiling applications. 2. Batt insulation (acoustical) for interior partition applications. 3. Safing insulation. ON% 1.3 SUBMITTALS l: A. Product Data for each type of insulation product specified. pr. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE t A. Single -Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products complying with requirements indicated without delaying the Work. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated on Drawings or specified elsewhere in this Section as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. i 1. Surface -Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire -Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. .,. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide e products by one of the following: 1. Glass -Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corporation. b. Knauf Fiber Glass. C. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. t d. Schuller International, Inc. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 07210 - 1 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. B. Foil -Scrim -Kraft Faced, Glass -Fiber Batt Insulation: Flame -resistant _. thermal insulation combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders and faced on one side with foil-scrim-kraft vapor retarder to comply with ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A; and with other requirements indicated below: 1. Application: Above Suspended Ceilings of Toilets and Conference Rooms. 2. Thermal Resistivity: R-19 (6" thickness). 3. Flame -spread rating: 25 (Class A). C. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Batt Insulation: Thermal -acoustical insulation combining glass fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 665, Type I; and with other requirements indicated below: 1. Application: Interior stud partitions for sound reduction. 2. Thermal Resistivity: R-11 (3 1/21' thickness). 3. Flame -spread rating: 25 (Class A). 2.3 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES A. Slag -Wool -Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semirigid boards designed for use as fire stop at openings between interior partitions and roof decks, slabs or exterior walls, produced by combining slag -wool fibers with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA and IB; nominal density of 4 lb/cu. ft.; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; thermal resistivity of 4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F. B. Caulking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke. C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated 'to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated. E. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless 07210 - 2 multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install blankets (or batts) in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For wood -framed construction with faced blankets having stapling flanges, position insulation to produce &i inch continuous air space between insulation facing and inner surface of concealing finish material, unless otherwise indicated. Secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members. 4. For wood -framed construction with faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to produce airtight installation after concealing finish material is in place. C. Stuff glass -fiber loose -fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION A. Install safing insulation to fill gap between edge of floor slabs or roof decks and interior partitions safing clips spaced as needed to support insulation, but not further apart than 24 inches o.c. Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with caulking approved by safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no voids in completed installation. 3.6 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 07210 - 3 F SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS �n PART 1 - GENERAL f 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specifications Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Perform all work required to complete the joint packing or filler, priming, caulking and sealing indicated by the Drawings and specified herein, including sealant at exterior openings and masonry walls. B. Furnish all supplementary items necessary to complete weatherproof the building in those areas associated with the roofing and flashing work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sealant material manufactured by any of the following manufacturers is acceptable provided it complies with the requirements of this section. 1. Pecora Chemical Corporation 2. Sonneborn Building Products, Inc. 3. Products Research and Chemical Corporation 4. Tremco Manufacturing company 5. W. R. Grace and Company 6. General Electric Company 7. Mameco International, Inc. 8. Gibson-Homans Company 1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver materials in unopened containers as packaged by the manufacturer. 1" Store in a manner to protect materials from the weather. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturers published data for sealants. Show each color j, available. Color selection for each sealant shall be by the Architect. B. When requested by the Architect, submit samples of cured sealants and a 6" long sample of each type of joint backup if required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Sealant at applications other than interior caulking shall be equal to Vulkem 116 polyurethane sealant as manufactured by Mameco International, Inc. of Cleveland, Ohio. C. Caulking Compound: One part acrylic latex caulk for general purpose interior caulking capable of being painted with latex or oil base paints. F. Backing Rods shall be closed cell polyethylene or open cell polyurethane as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the application conditions encountered. G. Primer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for each type of surface application. I07900 - 1 t, PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine all surfaces to receive sealant and report all conditions not acceptable. Installation shall be deemed as acceptance of the surface. B. Clean all surfaces and joints thoroughly, removing all foreign matter, dust, oil, grease, surface water, dirt, frost, old caulking material and previously applied paint or primer. C. Prime and prepare surfaces in strict accordance with sealant _.. manufacturers written instructions and recommendations. D. Report unsatisfactory surfaces to the Architect. 3.2 APPLICATION OF SEALANTS A. Follow sealant manufacturers instructions regarding preparation, priming, application life and application procedure. B. Apply masking tape where required in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. _ C. Apply sealant under pressure with gun having nozzle of proper size, or other appropriate means. Provide sufficient pressure to fill joints. D. Neatly point or tool sealant to provide proper contour. Use clean water -wet tool or tooling solution recommended by manufacturer when tooling white or light colored sealant. 3.3 APPLICATION OF CAULKING A. Caulk joints before final coat of paint is applied to adjacent surface. rApply caulking with a pressure gun having a nozzle of proper size to fit joint. Completely fill joint and firmly tool against backing to make a smooth, convex bed, and assure good adhesion. Caulking shall develop a firm skin before painting is allowed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant excesses or smears. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. B. Leave all finished work in a neat, clean condition. Remove all debris resulting from these operations from the site. END OF SECTION 07900 07900 - 2 FSECTION 08114 - CUSTOM STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes custom steel doors and door frames as indicated and scheduled on the drawings. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors. 2. Section 08710 Finish Hardware. 4. Section 09900 Painting. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. D. Door Schedule: Submit schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Contract Drawings. 1. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" and as specified. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics .per ASTM E 152, and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard -wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrappers on doors become F08114 - 1 wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: :Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Doors and Frames: a. Curries Co. b. Republic Builders Products. C. Steelcraft. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial -quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 (ASTM A 569M), free of scale, pitting, ., or surface defects. B. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial -quality, level, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M). _ C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel of commercial -quality, complying with ASTM A 526 (ASTM A 526M), or ASTM A 642 (ASTM A 642M), drawing quality, hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 525, with A60 coating designation. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.0478-inch thick steel sheet; 0.0516-inch thick galvanized steel where used with galvanized steel _ frames. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot -dip galvanize,complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. 2.3 DOORS A. Steel Doors: Provide 1-3/4-inch thick doors of materials and ANSI/SDI 100 grades and models specified below, or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: 1. Exterior Doors: Grade III, extra heavy duty, Model 2, face sheets of 16 gauge, seamless design. Provide A60 coating. 2. Interior Doors: Grade II, heavy duty, Model 1, face sheets 18 gauge, seamless design. Provide A60 coating only where scheduled. 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, according to ANSI/SDI 100, and of types and styles as shown _ on Drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exterior Frames: 14 gauge steel. Provide A60 coating. 2. Interior Doors: 16 gauge steel. Provide A60 coating only where scheduled. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners. 2. Fabricate frames for interior openings over 48 inches wide from 14 gauge steel sheet. B. Door Silencers: Except on'weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double -door frames. C. Plaster Guards.: Provide minimum 0.0179-inch thick steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials 08114 - 2 might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects, warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials according to SDI standards: a. Rigid mineral fiber with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between non -fire -rated pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. a. Fire Doors: Provide clearances according to NFPA 80. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel sheet. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames". D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. �.. E. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. F. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and r, concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. r G. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface -applied hardware may be done at Project site. H. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to the Door and Hardware Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." I. Glazing Stops: Minimum 18 gauge steel. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw -applied, removable, glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual", for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. r„ B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for steel sheet finishes. C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. l 2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES t A. Surface Preparation: Solvent -clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1 to F 08114 - 3 remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel to comply with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling). B. Pretreatment: Immediately after surface preparation, apply a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. C. Factory Priming for Field -Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance criteria, is compatible with finish paint systems indicated, and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. -- PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing concrete, masonry, or gypsum board assembly construction, place frames before constructing enclosing -- walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and — masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. At existing concrete or masonry construction, install at least 3 completed opening anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. Install fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. , Door Installation: Fit hollow -metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI 100. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke -Control Doors: Comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Prime Coat Touchup: After erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08114 08114 -'4 F SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid core flush doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Solid wood door frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 06114 Custom Steel Doors And Frames. 2. Section 08710 Finish Hardware. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and louvers, and factory -finishing specifications. C. Shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for veneer matching and factory finishing and other pertinent data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: 1. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements. B. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors that comply with NFPA 80; are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152; and are labeled and listed by UL, Warnock Hersey, or another testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers as designated on shop drawings, using temporary, removable, or concealed markings. r F08211 1 1.6 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. a. Solid Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Solid Core Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Buell Door Co. C. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division. d. Marlite. e. Weyerhauser Co. 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: 1 3/41' thickness comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces (Refer to Door Schedule on Drawings): Red oak, plain sliced or American Walnut, plain sliced. 2. Vertical Edges: Red oak for transparent finish. 3. Grade: Custom. 4. Construction: 7 plies. 5. Core: Solid wood -block, particleboard or mineral core with wood lock blocks, as required to comply with the specified guarantee period. 6. Bonding: Stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. B. Fire -Rated Solid Core Doors: 1 3/4" thickness comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces and Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non -fire -rated doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core`construction as required to provide fire -resistance rating indicated. 3. Blocking: Provide composite blocking designed to maintain fire resistance of door. 4. Edge Construction: Match non -fire -rated doors. 08211 - 2 71 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush wood doors to comply with following requirements: r1. In sizes indicated for job -site fitting. t 2. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements of NFPA 80 for fire - resistance -rated doors. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with matching wood moldings as recommended by door manufacture. 2.4 INTERIOR WOOD DOOR FRAMES A. Interior Wood Door Frames for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Frame and Trim (Refer to Door Schedule on Drawings): Red oak, plain sliced or American Walnut, plain sliced. 2. Grade: Custom. 3. Construction: Comply with AWI Standards and fire rating requirements. 4. Profile and Design: Refer to Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08710 Finish Hardware. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and referenced quality standard and as indicated. jto 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according requirements of NFPA 80. C. Job -Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Fitting Clearances for Non -Fire -Rated Doors: Provide 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, 1/16 inch per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4-inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire -Rated Doors: Comply with NFPA 80. F 08211 - 3 3. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 4. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting or machining is required at the job site. F. Field -Finished Doors: Refer to the following for finishing requirements: 1. Section 09900 Painting. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08211 08211 4 FSECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum storefront work: r� 1. Exterior entrance doors. I 2. Interior vestibule doors. l 3. Storefront -type framing system with transoms and sidelites. 4. Storefront -type framing system (fixed windows). B. Related Sections: 1. Refer to Section 08800 for glass and glazing. 2. Refer to Section 08710 for finish hardware. t 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide aluminum storefront assemblies that comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to test methods indicated. B. Design Requirements: Provide aluminum storefront systems that comply with structural performance, air infiltration, and water penetration requirements indicated. 1. Wind Loads: Provide aluminum storefront assemblies capable of withstanding wind pressures of 20 psf (958 Pa) inward and 20 psf (958 Pa) outward acting normal to the plane of the wall. C. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum storefront framing system with an air infiltration rate of not more than 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. (0.3 L/s x sq. m) of fixed area (excluding operable door edges) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at an inward test pressure differential of 1.57 psf (75 Pa). D. Water Penetration: Provide framing systems with no uncontrolled water penetration (excluding operable door edges) as defined in the test method when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at an inward test pressure differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft. (299 Pa). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each aluminum storefront system required, including: a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods. b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories. C. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces. t 2. Shop drawings for each aluminum storefront system required, including: a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to adjacent work. k F08410 - 1 b. Elevations at 1/4 inch = l foot (1:50) scale. C. Detail sections of typical composite members. d. Anchors and reinforcement. e. Glazing details. 3. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of each specified color and finish on 12-inch (300-mm) long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of color variations. 4. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the right to require additional samples, that show fabrication techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories. 5. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum storefront systems have been tested in accordance with specified test procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed installations of aluminum storefront similar in design and extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum storefront systems produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful in-service performance. C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum storefront systems fabricated by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those �- indicated for this Project, and that have a record of successful in-service performance. The fabricator shall have sufficient production capacity to produce components required without causing delay in progress of the Work. D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum storefront systems from one source and from a single manufacturer. E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and dimensional -- requirements of aluminum storefront work required and are based on KAWNEER TRIFAB II 451 SERIES. Aluminum storefront by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the work. 1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not necessarily —. limited to: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive leakage or air infiltration. -- 2. Faulty operation. 08410'- 2 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond normal weathering. B. Warranty Period: 3 years after the date of Substantial Completion. C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 - PRODUCTS t 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amarlite Architectural Products. 2. Kawneer Company, Inc. 3. PPG Industries. l 4. Tubelite Division of Indal, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish; comply with ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) for aluminum sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 (ASTM B 211M) for aluminum bars, rods and wire. B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot rolled sheet and strip. C: Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of "Glass and Glazing" section of these specifications. D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware, anchors and k l other components. 1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw -anchor into aluminum members less than 0.125 inches (3.2 mm) thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide standard noncorrosive pressed -in splined grommet nuts. 2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips flat -head machine screws that match the finish of member or hardware being fastened. E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (0.5-mm) minimum dead -soft stainless steel, or 0.026-inch (0.7-mm) thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront framing systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile indicated. Include subframes and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting stops. Shop -fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams. I' 7 08410 - 3 1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation to the exterior. -- 2. Infill Panels: Provide flush -laminated infill panels of thickness indicated, fabricated with panel core material laminated with waterproof glue between two sheets of aluminum. B. Stile and Rail Type Aluminum Doors: .-. 1. Frame: Provide tubular frame members, fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie -rods — or j-bolts. 2. Design: Provide doors 1 3/4" thick and the designs indicated. a. Medium stile (3 1/2" nominal width with 10" bottom rail), equal to, Kawneer Series 350 Medium Series complying with current ADA requirements. b. Wide stile (5" nominal width with 10" bottom rail), equal to, -- Kawneer Series 500 Wide Series complying with current ADA requirements. 3. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or panels, without disassembly of door stiles and rails. Provide snap -on extruded aluminum glazing stops, with exterior stops anchored for non -removal. C. Door Hardware: 1. General: Refer to hardware section of Division 8 for requirements for hardware items other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrances manufacturer. — 2. Provide manufacturer's heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of each door, including the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by manufacturer for service required, finish to match door. �. a. Ball -Bearing Butts: Provide 5-knuckle, 2-bearings, steel ball bearing butts sized to comply with ANSI A156.1, Grade 1; provide 2 butts for doors 7'-6" or less, 3 for taller doors. b. Surface -Mounted Overhead Closers: Provide modern type surface - mounted overhead closers, equal to, LCN 4040 (for exterior closers); comply with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with - manufacturer's recommendations for size of closer, depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Include Hold -Open Arm and Delayed -Action Closing Device. C. Door Stop: Provide floor or wall mounted door stop, as appropriate, with integral rubber bumper; comply with ANSI A156.16, Grade 1. . d. Cylinders: Supplied under another Division 8 Section for keying into the building system. e. Panic Hardware: Provide Kawneer standard rim panic exist device, or approved equal. f. Pull Handles: Provide Kawneer No. C09 aluminum pull handles, or approved equal. _ g. Thresholds: Provide extruded aluminum threshold of size (maximum height 1/211) and design indicated in mill finish, complete with anchors and clips. - 08410 - 4 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate aluminum storefront components to designs, sizes and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve design r requirements and coordination with other work. 1 B. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint, or a L suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape, or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead. C. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline ff fit of contacting members. 1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal. D. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 2.5 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. C. Class I Color Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A42%A44 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil (0.018 mm)) complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1.. 1. Color: Dark Bronze (No.40). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and other conditions that affect installation of aluminum storefronts. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the installation. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation. B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of framing members,o r panels. Install components in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum storefront to comply with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 8.7 m) of length or 1/4 inch (6 mm) in any total length. 2. Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not exceed 1/16 F08410 - 5 inch (1.5 mm). 3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch (3 mm). 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out -of -plane offset of framing at corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. -, 1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners after fabrication. 2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over aluminum. 3. Paint aluminum surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete or other masonry with alkali resistant coating. E. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight construction. Comply with requirements of Division 7 for sealants, fillers, and gaskets. F. Refer to "Glass and Glazing" Section of Division 8 for installation of glass —. and other panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed by manufacturer. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation without binding, and for weathertight closure. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to coatings. B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained in the "Glass and Glazing" Section for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances from aluminum surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that aluminum storefronts will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 08410 08410 - 6 FSECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE 4�4 PART 1 - GENERAL i 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions -to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. B. The extent of finish hardware is shown on the Drawings and as scheduled t herein. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 08114 Custom Steel Doors And Frames. 2. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors. 3. Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances And Storefronts. D. Cabinet hardware is specified under Section 06402. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data including manufacturers' technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Keying information. D. Samples of each type of exposed hardware unit in finish indicated and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit samples prior to submission of final hardware schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, .be incorporated in the 7 08710 - 1 Work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. E. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work f- to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this ;. Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. B. Fire -Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for -fire -rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire -rated door and door frame labels. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. Hager Hinge Co. b. McKinney Products Co. C. Select Products. 2. Cylinders and Locksets: a. Corbin. 3. Closers, Kick Plates, Exit Devices, Seals and Miscellaneous Items: a. Adams -Rite. b. Glynn -Johnson. C. Ives. d. LCN. e. Locknetics. f. National Guard. g- Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco). L i. Von Duprin. 2.2 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. 08710 - 2 n y 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name ` of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the 7product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit Fli removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire -rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. �^ 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, 7 and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality `°. than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or l forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self -tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as �* possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. ' E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are r+ available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation f where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. ' 2.4 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template -produced units. t- B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat -head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For.fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch (32-mm), threaded - to -the -head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out -Swing Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins. 2. Out -Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins. 3. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins. 4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. 08710 3 - D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches (2250 mm) or. less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches (750 mm) of additional height. 1. Fire -Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches (2150 mm) or less in height with same rule for additional hinges. 2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, all locksets shall be keyed to the existing masterkey system. B. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 1. Permanently inscribe each key with a number that identifies each lock and cylinder manufacturer key symbol. C. Keys Material and Quantity: 1. Provide keys of nickle silver only. 2. Furnish 3 change keys for each lock and 5 masterkeys for each master system. 3. Deliver all keys to Owner's representative. 2.6 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. General: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, .permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by systems manufacturer, with capacity for 200% of the number of locks required for the project. 1. Provide complete cross index system set up by key control manufacturer and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as determined by the final key schedule. 2. Provide hinged -panel type metal cabinet with locking device, for wall mounting. 2.7 HARDWARE FINISHES A. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry -recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes 08710 - 4 have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets. 1. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. B. Heading #1: Doors Marked #1, 2, 3, 4 & 12 each to have 1. 2 Cylinders 1080 Corbin 2. Balance by door manufacturer C. Heading #2: Doors Marked #5 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x US10A Hager 2. 1 * Acc. Cntrl Lock CM5157-SEL-LC-ATR-613 Locknetics 3. 1 Cylinder 1080 626 Corbin 4. 1 Closer 4041DA x DkBrz LCN 5. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 6. 1 set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Pemko D. Heading #3: Doors Marked #6, 7 & 8 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 1 Push/Pull Latch 1580 x Us10B Trimco 3. 1 Closer 4041AD x DkBrz LCN 4. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x UslOB Trimco 5. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 6. 3 Silencers Trimco E. Heading #4: Doors Marked #9 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 1 Privacy CL3420 AZD 613 Corbin 3. 1 Closer 4041DA x DkBrz LCN 4. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 5. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 6. 3 Silencers Trimco 08710 - 5 F. Heading #5: Doors Marked #10, 11, 13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 40, 41, 42, 43, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 66 67 & 71 each to have 1. 1 pr. Spring Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 1 Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 3. 1 Lockset CL3451AZD 613 Corbin 4. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 5. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 6. 3 Silencers Trimco G. Heading #6: Doors Marked #14, 29, 44, 65 & 68 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 1 Passage CL3410 AZD 613 Corbin 3. 1 Deadlock DL3013 613 Corbin 4. 1 Closer 1520 x TB X DkBrnz LCN 5. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 6. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 7. 1 Set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Trimco H. Heading #7: Doors Marked *19, 20, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31, 32, 38, 39, 49 & 51 each pair to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 1 Lockset CL3451 AZD 613 Corbin �-- 3. 1 Closer 1520 x TB x DkBrnz LCN 4. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco _ 5. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 6. 1 Set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Trimco �- I. Heading #8: Doors Marked #45 & 50 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 1 Lockset CL3457 AZD 613 Corbin _ 3. 1 Closer 1520 x TB x DkBrnz LCN 4. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco -- 5. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 6. 1 Set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Trimco J. Heading #9: Doors Marked *46 each pair to have 1. 3 pr. Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 2 Auto Flushbolt 3825/3815 x Us10B Trimco 3. 1 Acc. Control Lock CM5157-SEL-LC-ATR-613 Locknetics 4. 1 Cylinder 1080 626 Corbin 5. 2 Closers 4041DA x DkBrz LCN 6. 1 Coordinator 3092 Trimco 7. 2 Kickplates 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 8. 2 Wall Stops 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 9. 1 set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Pemko 10. 1 Astragal 18062 DP x DH Pemko K. Heading #10: Doors Marked *47 each pair to have 1. 3 pr. Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 2 Auto Flushbolt 3825/3815 x Us10B Trimco 3. 1 Lockset CL3451 AZD 613 Corbin 4. 2 Closers 4041DA x DkBrz LCN 5. 1 Coordinator 3092 Trimco 6. 2 Kickplates 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 08710 - 6 7. 2 Wall Stops 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 8. 1 set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Pemko 9. 2 Astragals 18062 DP x DH Pemko L. Heading #11: Doors Marked #48 & 50A each pair to have 1. 1 pr. Hinges BB 1279 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 2. 2 pr. Spring Hinges 1250 4.5 x 4.5 x Us10A Hager 3. 2 Auto Flushbolt 3825/3815 x Us10B Trimco 4. 1 Passage CL3410 AZD 613 Corbin 5. 1 Coordinator 3092 Trimco 6. 2 Wall Stops 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 7. 1 set Smoke Gasket S88-D x Opg. Pemko 8. 2 Astragals 18062 DP x DH Pemko M. Heading #12: Doors Marked #69 & 70 each to have 1. 1.5 pr. Hinges BB 1168 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP Us10A Hager 2. 1 Acc. Control Lock CM5157-SEL-LC-ATR-613 Locknetics 3. 1 Cylinder 1080 626 Corbin 4. 1 Closer 4041 x DkBrz LCN 5. 1 Kickplate 10" x DW-2" x Us10B Trimco 6. 1 Wall Stop 1276CCS x Us10B Trimco 7. 1 Threshold 170A x DW Pemko 8. 1 Door Bottom 315DN x DW Pemko 9. 1 set Weatherstrip 316DV x Opg. Pemko N. Heading #18: 1. 1 Key cabinet with key lock, 200% capacity and two tag system * No Substitutions on above. End of Hardware Schedule END OF SECTION 08710 08710 - 7 t SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Fixed windows and side lites. 2. Door view lites. 3. Entrance doors with tempered safety glass. 4. Storefront construction. 5. All glass sliding doors installed in wood casework. B. Related Sections: 1. Aluminum entrances and storefronts are specified in Section 08410. 2. Mirror glass is specified in Section 10800. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable), without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. Lr C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass r product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. j.a 1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual." 2. LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide." B. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for ff Project with a record of successful in-service performance. 4 r08800 - 1 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and as — needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ASG Industries, Inc. 2. CE Glass Division of Combustion Engineering, Inc. — 3. Libbey Owens Ford. 4. PPG Industries, Inc. 2.2 WIRE GLASS A. Wire Glass: Complying with ASTM 1036, Type II (patterned and wire glass, Flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q8 (glazing), of form and mesh pattern as indicated below: _. 1. Mesh: ml (diamond). 2. Thickness: 1/4" thick, or as required to comply with impact codes. 2.3 TEMPERED SAFETY GLASS A. Tempered Safety Glass: Uncoated, heated -treated float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, kind as indicated below: 1. Kind: FT (fully tempered). 2. Thickness: 1/4" thick, or as required to comply with impact codes. 3. Color: Bronze tint or clear as indicated on Door Schedule. 2.4 ALL GLASS SLIDING DOORS (INSTALLED IN WOOD CASEWORK) A. Tempered Safety Glass: Uncoated, heated -treated float glass complying with ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, kind as indicated below: 1. Kind: FT (fully tempered). 2. Thickness: 1/4" thick, or as required to comply with impact codes. 3. Color: Clear. 4. Exposed Door Edges: Polished. _. 2.5 GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with r^ referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 08800 - 2 E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side -walking). F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed -cell plastic foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to produce optimum sealant performance. 2.6 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean cut or flat grind vertical edges of butt -glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION ` A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. �.. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated on Drawings provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. f... C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. 08800 3 D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. E. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. V G. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. I. Set glass lites in each series withuniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING _ A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 08800 - 4 7 H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly,. with stretch allowance during installation. B. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. C. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. 3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's printed recommendations. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply �+ markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. a B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such �* protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove t them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less I than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or F damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 F F08800 - 5 SECTION 09255 — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This.Section includes the following: 1. Non -load -bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board drywall assemblies including trim accessories. 3. Gypsum board furring components. 4. Gypsum board finishing systems (joint treatments). B. Related Sections: The following Division contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 for thermal and sound attenuation insulation. 2. Division 9 for acoustical wall panels. 3. Division 9 for texture and painting. 1.3 DEFINITIONS n " A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where fire -rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to 1 i those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. t 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated.by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, 09255 - 1 construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum _panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions,.General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, ~ maintain not less than 40 deg F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F when -- using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Dietrich Industries, Inc. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. C. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Domtar Gypsum. b. Georgia-Pacific Corp. C. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. _ d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. General: Provide steel framing members complying with the following requirements: 1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40 hot -dip galvanized coating. B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg. and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base _. (uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179 inch minimum thickness of base metal, hat -shaped. D. Z-Furring Members: Manufacturer's standard Z-shaped,furring members with slotted or nonslotted web, fabricated ,from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653 or ASTM A 568; with a minimum base metal (uncoated) thickness of 0.0179 inch, face flange of 1-1/4 inch, wall -attachment flange of 7/8 inch, _ and of depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 09255 - 2 I E. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board manufacturers for applications k indicated. 2.3 CEILING SUPPORT MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS A. General: Provide ceiling support members complying with the following requirements: 1. Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 525, G40 hot -dip galvanized coating. B. Main Runners: Steel channels with rust inhibitive paint finish, hot or cold -rolled. C. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. D. Hanger Rods and Flats: Mild steel with zinc or equally rust -inhibitive coating for rods and zinc or rust -inhibitive paint finish for flats. E. Angle -Type Hangers: Not less than 7/8" x 7/8" x 16 gauge galvanized steel formed angles, with bolted connections and 5/16" diameter bolts. 1 F. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts, cast -in -place concrete inserts or other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices or by certificated test data. Size devices for 3 X calculated load supported except size direct pull-out concrete inserts for 5 X calculation loads. ' G. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179 inch minimum thickness of base metal, hat -shaped. H. Furring Members: ASTM C 645; 0.0179 inch minimum thickness of base metal, ' c-shaped studs. I. Furring Anchorages: 16 gauge galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire -type clips, bolts, nails or screws as recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with C 754. r J. Direct Suspension Systems: Manufacturer's standard zinc -coated or painted steel system of furring runners, furring tees, and accessories designed for concealed support of gypsum drywall ceilings; of proper type for use intendeded. r 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end -to -end butt joints. 1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, in 5/8 inch thicknesses to comply with ASTM C 840 r for application system and support spacing indicated. }t 2. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: 1. Type: Type X fire -resistive -rated. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch where indicated. 09255 - 3 C. Foil -backed Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM E 96 with vapor permeance and as follows: 1. Type: Type X fire -resistive -rated.. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch where indicated. 4. Application: Exterior walls only. D. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 79 as follows: 1. Type: Fire-resistant, water-resistant gypsum core encased in black water-repellent paper on both sides and long edges. 2. Edges: V-shaped T&G long edges. 3. Thickness: 1/2" inch. 4. Joint Treatment: As recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 2.5 A 2.6 A. B. TRIM ACCESSORIES Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel zinc -coated by hot -dip process. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C 1047: a. Corner bead on all outside corners. b. LC -bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC -beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. C. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. d. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be left without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where indicated. e. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use ressure-sensitive or staple -attached open -weave glass -fiber reinforcing tape with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum board and joint treatment materials for application indicated. C. Setting -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory -packaged, job -mixed, chemical -hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting -type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only, use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For prefilling gypsum board joints, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. 3. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended 09255 - 4 by the gypsum board manufacturer for this purpose. 4. For topping compound, use sandable formulation. D. Drying -Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory -packaged vinyl -based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready -Mixed Formulation: Factory -mixed product. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats. C. All-purpose compound .formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick and fastening gypsum board to gypsum board. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. D. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514. E. Asphalt -saturated organic felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No.15 asphalt felt) nonperforated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, cast -in - anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with l requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. r 3.2 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with !.. ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing r installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with details shown on Drawings. ! 1. where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates ceiling. 2. Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at floor. 09255 - 5 a. Provide slip- or cushioned -type joints as detailed to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members as indicated. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other.construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs 1i inch short of full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. For STC-rated and fire -resistive -rated partitions requiring partitions to extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading requirements specified: 1. Single -Layer Construction: Space studs at 24 inches o.c. E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so that .. leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219, and with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or, if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUPPORT MEMBERS r A. General: Install ceiling support members and systems in compliance with ASTM C 754. B. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible, otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. ._ 09255 - 6 C. Space main runners 4'-0" o.c. and space hangers 4'-0" o.c. along runners, ` except as otherwise shown. D. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1/41' in 12'-0", measured both Ilengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. E. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. F. Direct -hung Metal Support System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle wherever support system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join support C" members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. 1. Space furring members 24" o.c., except as otherwise indicated. G. Install auxiliary framing at termination of drywall work, and at openings for light fixtures and similar work, as required for support of both the drywall construction and other work indicated for support thereon. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end ` joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting joints over studs and staggered. t D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. r E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications i where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field -cut edges abut field -cut edges and ends. Do not place r tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of each 1 panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber including floor joists and headers. Instead, float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. . I. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor r-+ clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. jj J. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. 09255 - 7 K. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chase walls that are braced internally. 1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4-to-1/2-inch-wide joints to install sealant. L. . Isolate perimeter of non -load -bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide 1/4-to-1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. M. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. N. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off sound -flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. O. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single -Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints. 2. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 3. Install ceiling boards in the direction and manner which will minimize the number of end -butt joints, and which will avoid end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 1'-011. B. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.7 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length, and spacing of fasteners. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. 09255 - 8 1. Install LC -bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other ` construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 3. Install U-bead where indicated. I� 3.8 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints; penetrations; r' fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. is B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using }^� setting -type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges. D. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints and to trim accessories with concealed face flanges as recommended by trim accessory manufacturer and as P^ required to prevent cracks from developing in joint compound at flange ( edges. E. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214. R 1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire -resistive -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies. 2. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated. F. For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply r� three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Use one of the following joint compound combinations: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or taping compound. 2. Fill (Second) Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish (Third) Coat: Ready -mixed, drying -type, all-purpose or topping compound. G. Where level 3 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compounds specified for first and second coat in addition to embedding coat. H. Where level 2 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for first coat in addition to embedding coat. I. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound specified for embedding coat. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. g�g END OF SECTION 09255 4 7+ 09255 - 9 41 F FSECTION 09300 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Unglazed porcelain ceramic mosaic tile (with sealer). 2. Unglazed porcelain ceramic tile cove base. 3. Glazed wall tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS 4 A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tile showing full range of r colors, textures, and patterns available for each type and composition of the indicated. Include samples of grout and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared on samples of size and construction indicated, products involve color and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations expected. 1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on plywood or hardboard backing and grouted. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each cementitious rand admixture component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. 1 C.. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design, and rextent to that indicated for Project. l 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals i unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement of 1 ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign matter, and other causes. C. Handle tile with temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If despite 09300 - 1 i these precautions coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from carbon dioxide buildup. C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or manufacturer's instructions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types, compositions, and grades of tile indicated. 1. Furnish the complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Olean Tile Co. 2. Dal -Tile Corp. 3. Summitville Tiles, Inc. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat tile equal to, Dal Tile, Dal -Keystone Porcelain Ceramics Standard and Dal -Coordinate System, complying with the following requirements: 1. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range (all price groups) of manufacturer's standard colors. a. Maximum of two colors selection per space. 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 2 inches by 2 inches. 3. Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch. 4. Face: Plain with cushion edges. B. Base Units: Provide porcelain ceramic tile base to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements: 1. Size: 4" high , coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. 2. Shapes: Coved. C. Glazed Wall Tile: Provide factory -mounted flat tile equal to, Dal Tile, Dal-Softones, Dal -Semi -Gloss or Dal -Matte Series Glazed Wall Tile, complying with the following requirements: 1. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range (all price groups) of manufacturer's standard colors. a. Maximum of four color selections per space. Refer to drawings for banding pattern. 09300 - 2 2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 4 1/4 inches by 4 1/4 inches. 3. Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with square edge, modified square edge, or cushion edge. 5. Mounting: Factory back -mounted. 2.4 TILE ACCESSORIES A. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503 requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where exposed to foot traffic, a minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C 241. 1. Size: 4 inches wide x 1/2 inch maximum height. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. 2.5 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4. B. Portland Cement Mortar: ASTM C-150, Type I. C. Water: Potable. D. Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. E. Sand: ASTM C-144. F. Mortar: 1 part portland cement, 6 parts damp sand by volume. G. Grout: Sand-portland cement grout, composition as follows: 1. 1 part portland cement to 1 part fine sand used for joints up to 1/8" wide. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sealer: Provide product specifically recommended by tile and grout manufacturer. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI A108.1 series of tile installation standards included under "American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated. 09300 - 3 B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with applicable portions of TCA installation Method F111. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures ^- to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is not apparent in finished work. F. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts, comply with ANSI A108.10. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile -- surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions, but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to brick and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains. B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work. C. Provide final floor sealer and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7 days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. -- END OF SECTION 09300 09300 - 4 r FSECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes ceilings composed of acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. ' B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection in the form. of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual acoustical panels or sections of panels and sections of suspension system members showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each ceiling assembly indicated. D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared r on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations r expected. 1. 6-inch square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Full-size samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 3. Set of 12-inch long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire -response tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. Qualified testing and inspecting agencies include Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Warnock Hersey, or another agency that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that performs testing and follow-up services. 2. Surface -burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING j A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site ll in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 4 09511 - 1 C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any .way. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS. A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies (if any). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING PANELS, GENERAL A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Building Products Division. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. -- 2.2 CEILING PANELS A. Nondirectional Fissure Panels: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc., Omni Fissured Item No.344, complying with the following requirements: 1. Color: White. 2. Edge Detail: Square. -� 3. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 4. Size: 24 by 24 inches. B. Fine Textured Triple Step Cut Edge Panels: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc., -- Frost Pedestals I Item No.400, complying with the following requirements: 1. Color: White. 2. Edge Detail: PE. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Size: 24 by 24 inches. C. Fire Code Fine Textured Panels: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc., Frost Panels Item No.413, complying with the following requirements: 1. Color: White. 2. Edge Detail: Square. 3. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 4. Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. B. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 09511 - 2 F 1. Zinc -Coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 12 gauge. D. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal types and profiles indicated or, if not indicated, provide manufacturer's standard molding for edges and penetrations of ceiling which fits with type of edge detail and suspension system indicated. 2.4 EXPOSED METAL DIRECT -HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS: k " A. Metal Suspension System Used With Nondirectional Fissure Panels: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc., DX24 System, 15/16" standard grid, complying with the f" I following requirements: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System. 2. Finish: Standard corrosion -resistant finish. 3. Color: Match color of acoustical panels. 4. Hold Down Clip System: Corrosion resistant type as recommended by suspension system manufacturer. B. Metal Suspension System Used With Fine Textured Panels: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc., Centricitee DXT24 System, 9/16" standard grid, complying with the following requirements: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System. 2. Finish: Standard corrosion -resistant finish. 3. Color: Match color of acoustical panels. 4. Hold Down Clip System: Corrosion resistant type as recommended by suspension system manufacturer. C. Fire Rated Metal Suspension System: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc., One Hour Fire Rated Centricitee System, 9/16" standard grid, complying with the r jl following requirements: 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -Duty System. 2. Finish: Standard corrosion -resistant finish. r" 3. Color: Match color of acoustical panels. 4. Hold Down Clip System: Corrosion resistant type as recommended by L suspension system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, .with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast -in -place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 1. Furnish cast -in -place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish the layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less - than -half -width panels at borders, and conform to the layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. i!r> 09511 - 3 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. 2. U.B.C. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems: U.B.C. Standard No. 47-18. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of the supporting structure or of the ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Splay hangers only where required, and if permitted with fire- . resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of 3 tight turns. Connect hangers either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 7. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of 4 tight turns. Fasten bracing wires to concrete with cast -in -place or postinstalled anchors. S. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms. Fasten hangers to cast -in -place hanger inserts, powder -actuated fasteners, or drilled -in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. .� 10. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 11. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown; and provide hangers not -. more than 8 inches from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not over 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately _. and connect securely. 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. 09511 - 4 a; E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit. 1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction - match existing ceiling system. 2. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 3. Install hold-down clips in vestibules and corridors areas and other areas as indicated. Provide clips areas required by governing regulations, or for fire -resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated or required. 4.. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire -resistance -rated assembly. t: 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09511 a . r" 09511 - 5 SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division- 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Acoustical wall panels applied over gypsum board. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of acoustical wall panel specified. C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of acoustical wall panels including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other construction. D. Samples for initial selection in 12-inch square units of each type of acoustical wall panel required and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include representative samples of installation devices and accessories. E. Samples for verification in 12-inch square units of each type of acoustical wall panel required and in each color, texture, and pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include representative samples of installation devices and accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with surface -burning characteristics as indicated below, as determined by testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical to those required in this Section, per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify acoustical wall panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Single -Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each type of acoustical wall panel from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. L< 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment, storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until wet - work, such as concrete and plaster, has been completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces for t acoustical wall panels have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and temperature conditions as planned for occupancy. al 09521 - 1 Maintain temperature and humidity as recommended by panel manufacturer. B. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the,Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating acoustical wall panels without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS _. 2.1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing ., materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in fabric weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive or other foreign matter. 1. Fabricate back -mounted panels in factory to exact sizes required to fit wall surfaces based on field measurements of completed substrates indicated to receive acoustical wall panels. 2. Where radius corners are indicated, attach facing material so there are no seams or gathering of material. B. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Overall height and width of panels Plus or minus 1/16 inch. C. Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with minimum noise reduction coefficients (NRC) indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM C 423 for mounting type specified under individual product requirements. D. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard material is indicated, provide acoustical wall panels faced with manufacturer's material complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors, textures, and patterns for products of type indicated. 2.2 SPLINE -MOUNTED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. Spline -Mounted Acoustical Wall Panels with Perforated Mineral Fiberboard or Cementitious Fiberboard Core: Equal to, USG Interiors, Inc. Silent FM Wall Panels; with long edges kerfed and rabbeted to receive splines; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Thickness and NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 3/4 inch and NRC of 0.60-0.70.' 2. Facing Material: Manufacturer's standard woven fabric, Hytex Coppersmith or Hytex Plisse Series. 3. Panel Width: 30 inches. 4. Panel Height: 120 inches. B. Spline -Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard concealed extruded - aluminum or plastic connecting splines designed and fabricated for screw attachment to walls, with other moldings and trim for interior and exterior corners as required. Provide panel manufacturer's standard factory -applied _ finish on exposed items in the following color: 1. Color: Match color of facing material. 09521 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical wall panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. !!1 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Comply iii with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, if none indicated, as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut edge to match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly. B. Construction Tolerances: As follows: �. 1. Variation from Plumb and Level: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. f l 2. Variation of Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch. C. Remove and replace panels that are damaged and are unacceptable to Architect. 3.3 CLEANING A. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials from the facing, using a dry brush, a vacuum, or both. B. Clean panels with vinyl facing, upon completion of installation, to remove dust and other foreign materials from the facing, using warm water and a clean sponge; wipe dry. C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical wall panel installation, upon completion of the Work, and leave areas of installation in a neat and clean condition. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensures that acoustical wall panels are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. B. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, prior to the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09521 F09521 - 3 r FSECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Rubber wall base. 3. Resilient flooring accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. C. Samples for initial selection purposes of manufacturer's standard sample sets in form of pieces cut from each type of product specified showing full range of colors and patterns available. D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches long, of each different color and pattern of product specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F in spaces to receive products r specified in this Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F. 09650 - 1 B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as that of the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation of products in this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Resilient Flooring Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong 2. Azrock Floor Products Division 3. Tarkett Inc. B. Available Rubber Base Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Johnson Rubber Co., Inc. 2. Roppe Rubber Co. 3. Vinyl Plastics, Inc. 2.2 RESILIENT FLOORING A. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: FS SS-T-312B, Type IV Comp.l, and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8"•. 2. Size: 12" x 12". 3. Colors and Patterns: Equal to, Tarkett Thru-Chip Floor Tile, Basic Structures Series, Classics Series or Signals Series. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Accent Border Color and Patterns: Equal to, Tarkett Thru-Chip Floor Tile, Collage Series or Keystones Series. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. a. In Receiving Area 235 and Freight Elevator Lobby 236 ONLY, provide a 12" wide (nominal dimension) accent color borders as indicated on the Drawings. Exact location shall be as directed by Architect. 2.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40a, Type I, and as follows: 1. Gauge: 1/8". 2. Height: 4". 3. Style: Standard top -set cove. 4. Color: Equal to, VPI Premium Wall Base (120' rolls). Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Resilient Flooring Accessories: Transition strips, reducer strips and other such products as required to provide a complete floor system. Colors and profiles as selected by Architect. 2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland- cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for 09650 - 2 r Fapplications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush. D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer, prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's directions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2.. Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed. t 3.4 CLEANING, WAXING AND PROTECTION CA. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner �^ recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. 1 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. l 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop resilient accessories to remove black marks and soil. 09650 - 3 B. Wax and buff floor tile in accordance with tile manufacturer's written instructions. Provide copies of instructions to Architect and Owner. C. Clean and wax products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09650 09650 - 4 r FSECTION 09680 - CARPET PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet and installation. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Sections for removing existing flooring. 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Flooring and Accessories" for materials and installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data for each type of carpet material, carpet cushion, and installation accessory specified. Submit manufacturer's printed data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire -test - response characteristics. Submit methods of installation for each type of substrate. C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts or Samples of materials showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of carpet indicated. 111 D. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material type, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and carpet schedule. Submit r" the following: 1. 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples of each type of carpet material required. 2. 12-inch (300-mm) Samples of each type of exposed edge stripping and accessory item. E. Maintenance data for carpet and cushion to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet and carpet cushion, including manufacturer's recommended frequency for maintaining carpet. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. Include cleaning and stain - removal products and procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer with not less than five years experience and who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board r (FCIB) or who can demonstrate compliance with FCIB certification program Lrequirements. F09680 - 1 B. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of carpet from one source and by a single manufacturer. C. Carpet Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide carpet with the following fire -test -response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface Flammability: Passes CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1630. 2. Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. 3. Smoke Developed: 450 or less per ASTM E 84. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 5: "Storage and Handling." B. Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and lot number. _ C. Store materials on -site in original undamaged packages, inside well - ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, with continuous blocking off ground. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6: "Site Conditions." B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent r- with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by carpet manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace carpet that does not meet requirements or that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. C. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET A. Carpet: Collins & Aikman "Monet SL", and as specified below: _. 1. Pile Yarn Weight: 20.0 ounces per square yard. 2. Backing: Mark I RS 3. Color: As selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. 09680 - 2 r F4. Installation: Direct glue down installation. B. Carpet Border (where indicated on Drawings): Collins & Aikman "Plexus Accents II", and as specified below: 1. Pile Yarn Weight: 20.0 ounces per square yard. 2. Backing: Mark I RS l 3. Color: As selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. t 4. Installation: Direct glue down installation. 2.2 MODULAR CARPET TILE A. Carpet: Collins & Aikman "Timeless" Style # 2417 Powerbond Modular Tile, and as specified below: 1. Size: 18" x 18" Tile. 2. Backing: Powerbond Fiberglass Reinforced Composition Tile 3. Color: As selected from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Installation: Direct glue down installation. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: As recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining type to suit I products and subfloor conditions indicated and to comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet as recommended by the following: l 1. Carpet manufacturer. t C. Seaming Cement: Hot -melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. D. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by carpet manufacturer, and approved rby Architect to meet project circumstances and requirements. t PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturer's installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Level subfloor within 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), noncumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. F09680 - 3 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subfloor as recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. -- C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. — D. Broom or vacuum clean subfloors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Resilient -Flooring Substrate Preparation: Replace missing pieces of existing resilient flooring or patch to level. Cut out peaked seams and fill with latex underlayment as recommended by manufacturer. Repair depressions with material recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. r-� 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8: "Direct Glue -Down." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpet. C. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, — thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. D. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. E. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation. 1. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. _ 3.5 PROTECTION A. General Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation." B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09680 09680 - 4 SECTION 09900 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY I A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field -painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers. 1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application of each material proposed for use. 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts. F09900 - 1 1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated. D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate., 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. B. Single -Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Field Samples: On wall surfaces and other exterior and interior components, duplicate finishes of prepared samples. Provide full -coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface until required sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in -place work. �- 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job -applied samples. 2. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Apply coatings in this room or surface according to the schedule or as specified. a. After finishes are accepted, this room or surface will be used to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well - ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F and 95 deg F. 09900 - 2 C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 F deg above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Coronado Paint Company. (CP). 2. The Glidden Company (Glidden). 3. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 4. Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (K-M). 5. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG). 6. Pratt and Lambert (P & L). 7. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W). 8. Technical Coatings, Inc. (TCI). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best -quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. r09900 - 3 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface -applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process.will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to .the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish -coat material with substrates primed by others. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panelsurfacesto be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast -cleaning methods if recommended by the paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of ,surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop -coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods 09900 4 that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). a. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by the paint system manufacturer and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 10. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. C. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according r to manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. . E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint 1 undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. t. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. P„O 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth r, even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with F09900 - 5 prime coat only. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. 10. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exterior faces. 11. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 12. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop -primed and touch-up painted. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not ^' deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. G. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Heat exchangers. 3. Tanks. 4. Ductwork. 5. Insulation. 6. Supports. 7. Motors and mechanical equipment. _ 8. Accessory items. H. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit and fittings. 2. Switchgear. I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be 09900 - 6 7 painted or finished and that has not been prime -coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. �., K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. L. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, :. spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. M. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth �! surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange .peel, nail holes, or other r„ surface imperfections. C. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. N. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Ferrous Metal: 1. Flat Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer: PPG: 6-206 Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. b. First and Second Coats: PPG: 50-52 Speedhide Exterior Lo-Luster House Paint - Oil. C. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. Semigloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: metal primer. Two finish coats over a galvanized 09900 - 7 a. Primer: PPG: 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. b. First and Second Coats: PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Oil Enamel. D. Traffic Markings: 1. Chlorinated Rubber Base Traffic Paint: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: As recommended by Paint Manufacture. b. First and Second Coats: Factory mixed, quick drying, complying with FS-TT-P-115, Type III or approved equal. C. Color for Handicap Parking Spaces: Blue. d. Color for Traffic Markings: Yellow. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. B. Concrete Masonry Units: 1. Semigloss, Alkyd -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over undercoat and filled surface. a. Block Filler: PPG: 6-7.Speedhide Masonry Latex Block Filler. b. Undercoat: PPG: 6-855 Speedhide Latex Enamel Undercoater. C. Finish Coat: PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. C. Woodwork (For Opaque Finish): 1. Semigloss, Alkyd -Enamel Finish: _Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: PPG: 17-255 Quick -Drying Enamel Undercoater. b. First and Second Coats: PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. D. Stained Woodwork: 1. Alkyd -Based, Satin -Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd -based, clear -satin varnish over a sealer coat and an alkyd -based, interior wood stain. Wipe filler before applying first varnish coat. a. Filler Coat: Not required. b. Stain Coat: PPG: 77-302 Interior Semi -Transparent Stain. C. Sealer Coat: PPG: 77-30 Interior Quick -Drying Sealer. d. First and Second Coats: PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Satin Clear. E. Ferrous Metal: 1. Semigloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: One finish coat over undercoater and _ a primer. a. Primer: PPG: 6-208 Speedhide Rust Inhibitive Steel Primer. b. Undercoat: PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. C. Finish Coat: PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. F. Zinc -Coated Metal: 1. Semigloss Alkyd -Enamel Finish: One finish coat over undercoat and a primer. a. Primer: PPG: 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. b. Undercoat: PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick -Dry Enamel Undercoater. r L. x C. Finish Coat: PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel. G. Gypsum Drywall Systems: L 1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: Three coats over texture application. ? a. Texture: See Texture Schedule below. b. Primer: PPG: 6-2 Quick -Dry Latex Primer Sealer. C. First Coat: PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. d. Second Coat: PPG: 80 Line Wallhide Flat Latex Paint. H. Gypsum Drywall Systems Interior*Texture:. 1. Texture Application for All New Walls: a. Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish. b. Texture: Orange peel pattern as selected by Architect. 2. Texture Application for Repaired Existing Walls: a. Primer: Of type recommended by manufacturer of texture finish. b. Texture: To match existing. I. Cotton or Canvas Covering over Insulation: 1. Flat Latex Emulsion Finish: Two coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildeewproof. a. First Coat: PPG: 50-35 Flat Latex Ceiling Paint. r b. Second Coat: PPG: 50-35 Flat Latex Ceiling Paint. l 1 END OF SECTION 09900 L t` p, d s ) 09900 — 9 SECTION 09950 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Prime coats for substrates are specified in Section 09900. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame resistance characteristics. C. Samples for initial selection purposes of each type of wall covering required, in manufacturer's standard sizes showing full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. D. Samples for verification purposes of each type, color, texture, and pattern of wall covering and molding accessory required, prepared on samples of size indicated below: 1. Full -width sample, not less than 36 inches long, of each wall covering specified. Show complete pattern repeat. 2. 36-inch long sample of each molding accessory. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide wall coverings with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify wall coverings with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Flame Spread: 10 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 25 or less. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory packages or containers, clearly labeled to identify manufacturer brand name, lot number, quality or grade and fire hazard classification. B. Store materials inside in original undamaged packaging, in a well ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures and humidity. Do not store rolled goods upright; lay flat, blocked off the j groung to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage area ll above 40 degree F (4 degree C). C. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. F09950 - 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a constant temperature not less than 60 deg F (16 deg C) in installation areas for at least 10 days before and 10 days after installation. B. Illuminate installation areas using the building permanent lighting system; temporary lighting alone will not be acceptable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL COVERING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Wall Covering - Type A: Equal to, Genon Contract Wallcovering, Type II, 20 oz., with Type I, 6 3/4" high continuous border. 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of following standard color/patterns: a. Sonoma Series b. Stoneham Series C. English Garden Series 2. 6 3/4" High Border Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of following standard color/patterns: a. Epic Collection b. Versailles Collection C. Overtones Collection B. Vinyl Wall Covering - Type B: Same as Type A, except delete requirement for 6 3/411'high continuous border. 1. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of following standard color/patterns: C. Number of Color/Pattern Selections: The Architect shall have the option to select six different color/patterns. A maximum of two color/patterns shall be used in any one space. -- 2.2 ADHESIVES A. General: Manufacturer's standard for use with specific wall covering and -- substrate application. Provide materials which are mildew -resistant, nonstaining, and strippable. B. Release Coat: Provide sealer or undercoat for new gypsum wallboard and previously painted substrates as recommended by wall covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Acclimatize wall covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation. B. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for surface preparation. -- 1. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. -- 3. Prime new gypsum board with a recommended primer. 09950 - 2 C. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semi -gloss, and eggshell finishes with fine sandpaper., 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. B. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps. C. Match pattern 72 inches (1800 mm) above finish floor. D. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches (150 mm) from outside corners and 3 inches (75 mm) from inside corners. No horizontal seams. E. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. F. Trim edges for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure at seams and edges. Butt seams. G. Install metal moldings in longest practical lengths. Adhere to substrate. Butt end joints and miter corners. 3.3 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use cleaning methods recommended by the wall covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. END OF SECTION 09950 09950 - 3 I FSECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments. B. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Plastic laminate finish. C. Styles of toilet compartments include: 6 E 1. Floor -anchored, overhead -braced. D. Toilet accessories, such as toilet paper holders and grab bars, are specified in another Division 10 Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories. C. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. D. Samples of full range of colors for each type of unit required. Submit 6 inch square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be used in work, for color verification after selections have been made. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments where taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. ' B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet compartments and related items. Coordinate rdelivery with other work to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plastic Laminate: a. American Sanitary Partition Corp.; Type PL-FF. !" b. General Partitions Manufacturing Corp.; Series 40. C. Sanymetal Products Corp.; Academy Series. 10155 - 1 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA Std. LD-3, minimum 0.050 inch thick, color and pattern as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect from plastic laminate manufacturer's standards. C. Core Material for Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's standard plywood or particleboard in thickness to provide nominal dimension of 1 inch minimum for all components. D. Concealed Anchorage Reinforcement: Minimum 0.108 inch, galvanized steel sheet. E. Concealed Tapping Reinforcement: Minimum 0.0785 inch, galvanized steel sheet. F. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not less than 3 inches high, 0.0396 inch thick, finished to match hardware. G. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design for attaching panels to walls and pilasters, either chromium -plated nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac") or anodized aluminum. H. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy duty operating hardware and accessories of chromium -plated, nonferrous cast alloy ("Zamac"). I. Overhead Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum, antigrip profile, with clear anodized finish. J. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, chromium -plated steel, or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft -resistant -type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot -dip galvanized, cadmium -plated, or other rust -resistant protective - coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and internal reinforcement to receive partition -mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24 inch wide in - swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 34 inch wide (clear opening) out -swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped. C. Plastic Laminate Compartments and Screens: Pressure -laminate one-piece face sheets to core material with no splices or joints and with edges straight and sealed. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect against moisture. D. Overhead -Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous, extruded, aluminum, antigrip, overhead bracing at top of each pilaster. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. E. Floor -Supported Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters to permit structural connection at floor. Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage. 10155 - 2 F. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with ANSI A117.1 for handicapped accessibility and as follows: 1. Hinges: Cutout inset type, adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring -action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's standards. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit, designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber - tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories. 4. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out -swinging doors. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors. 2.4 FINISH A. Color: One of manufacturer's standard colors in each room, as indicated or, if not indicated, as selected by Architect. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than Id inch between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Overhead -Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors (and r entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 10155 10155 - 3 r 1. FSECTION 10425 - SPECIALTY SIGNS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions To Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following types of signs: 1. Engraved laminated plastic identification plates thirty (30) required. A schedule of room titles shall be furnished by the Owner. 2. Free standing handicap parking signs - four(4) required. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: . 1. Division 16 Section for illuminated exit signs. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings showing fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, layout, reinforcement, accessories, and �. installation details. 1. Provide, message list for each sign required, including large-scale details of wording and lettering layout. 2. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as a unit of Work in other Sections. 3. Templates: Furnish full-size spacing templates for individually mounted dimensional letters and numbers. B. Samples: Provide samples of each sign component for initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and for verification of compliance with requirements indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar C to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. B. ADA and EAB Compliance: All applicable signs and interior identification l plates shall comply with all current ADA and EAB standards and requirements. t All signs shall be furnished with braille or other tactile graphics recommended for use by the physically handicapped. C. Single -Source Responsibility: For each separate sign type required, obtain signs from one source of a single manufacturer. D. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions and profiles do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 7111 10425 - 1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Andco Industries Architectural Signage Systems. 2. Best Manufacturing Sign System. 3. Nelson -Harkins Industries. 2.2 ENGRAVED IDENTIFICATION PLATES A. Engraved Identification Plates: Equal to, Nelson -Harkins, Style TS450, with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements: 1. Nominal Size: 8" x 13" 2. Color: As selected by Architect, from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Edge Color for Plastic Laminate: Edge color same as background. ._ 4. Corner Condition: Corners rounded to 1/2" radius. 5. Letter Size and Type: 1" high letters, Helvetica Medium, all upper case. 6. Logo: Internal handicap toilet logos for Men's Toilets, Women's Toilets and Unisex Toilets. 7. ADA and EAB Compliance: All signs to be furnished with tactile imaging as required to meet current ADA and EAB Standards. 2.3 FREE STANDING HANDICAP PARKING SIGNS A. Free Standing Handicap Parking Signs: Fabricated from 16 gauge bonderized steel or .063" aluminum with white baked enamel background and colored screen printed graphics. 1. Size: As indicated on drawings. 2. Graphics: Letters and international symbols as indicated on drawings. _. 3. Post Design: 1 1/2" diameter steel or aluminum post with cap. 4. Mounting: Mounting height shall be in accordance with current ADA and EAB Standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. B. Wall -Mounted Signs: Attach signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Securely mount signs in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with concealed, theft -proof fasteners where appropriate. 2. Install on walls adjacent to strike side of doors, 8" maximum distance from the door jamb and 60" above floor to the center of the sign. 10425 - 2 3. Comply with all Rules of the State of Texas Program for the Elimination of Architectural Barriers and the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990. C. Free Standing Exterior Signs: Mount signs at heights indicated on Drawings, or as directed by Architect. 1. Concrete Base: Set poles in poured concrete base as indicated on Drawings, and if not indicated, in holes a minimum of 10" in diameter and 18" deep. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 10425 10425 - 3 4: k SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL p� L 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet accessory items as scheduled and as specified herein. 1.3 SUBMITTALS r a. A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including construction details relative to materials, dimensions, gages, profiles, rmounting method, specified options, and finishes. L C. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations (by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. D. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. E. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service recommendations. 1.4 A. QUALITY ASSURANCE Single -Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. B. Architect Approval: verify locations and mounting heights of all r accessories with Architect before installation. t PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Specialties, Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish, 0.034 inch (0.9 mm) minimum thickness. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, 10800 - 1 forgings, and flat products with finished edges, ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M); Castings, ASTM B 30. C. Sheet Steel: Cold -rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366 (ASTM A 366M), 0.04 inch (1.0 mm) minimum. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish. D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527 G60 (ASTM A 527M Z180). E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2. F. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel coating." G. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0 mm thick, conforming to ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro- plated copper coating, .and protective laminant coating. H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed. 2.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE: A. MEWS TOILET 106: 1. 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (34WX36H - laminant glass). 2. 1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bradley 250-15. 3. 1 - Toilet Paper Dispenser (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 1 - Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispenser: Bradley 6326-67. 5. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 B. WOMEN'S TOILET 107: 1. 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (48WX36H - laminant glass). 2. 1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bradley 250-15. 3. 1 - Toilet Paper Dispenser (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 1 - Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bradley 4791-15. 5. 1 - Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispenser: Bradley 6326-67. 6. 1 - Grab Bar Bradley 8122-001-4800 7. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 C. WOMEN'S TOILET 134: 1. 2 - Mirrors: Bradley 781-3 (91WX36H - laminant glass). 2. 2 - Paper Towel Dispensers: Bradley 250-15. 3. 3 - Toilet Paper Dispensers (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 3 - Sanitary Napkin Disposals: Bradley 4791-15. 5. 4 - Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispensers: Bradley 6326-67. 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 7. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 D. MEN'S TOILET 135: 1. 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (96WX36H - laminant glass). 2. 1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bradley 250-15. 3. 1 - Toilet Paper Dispenser (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 2 - Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispensers: Bradley 6326-67. 5. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 10800 - 2 r E. MEN'S TOILET 238: 1. 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (70WX36H - laminant glass). P. 2. 1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bradley 250-15. 3. 1 - Toilet Paper Dispenser (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 2 - Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispensers: Bradley 6326-67. 5. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 F. WOMEN'S TOILET 239: 1. 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (93WX36H - laminant glass). rM 2. 2 - Paper Towel Dispensers: Bradley 250-15. 3. 2 - Toilet Paper Dispensers (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 2 - Sanitary Napkin Disposals: Bradley 4791-15. 5. 2 - Lavatory Mounted Soap Dispensers: Bradley 6326-67. 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 7. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 G. MEN'S 1. TOILET A45: 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (30WX36H - laminant glass). 2. 1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bradley 250-15. 3. 1 - Toilet Paper Dispenser (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 1 - Soap Dispensers: Bradley 6542. 5. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 H. WOMEN'S TOILET A46: 1. 1 - Mirror: Bradley 781-3 (30WX36H - laminant glass). 2. 1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bradley 250-15. 3. 1 - Toilet Paper Dispenser (dual roll): Bradley 5402. 4. 1 - Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Bradley 4791-15. 5. 1 - Soap Dispensers: Bradley 6542. 6. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-4800 7. 1 - Grab Bar: Bradley 8122-001-3600 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of toilet and bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or on back surface, provide identification of each accessory item either by a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. B. Surface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible. C. Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise indicated, fabricate units of all -welded construction, without mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with full-length, stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage that is fully concealed when unit is closed. D. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation, as follows: 1. Provide galvanized -steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.9 mm) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material. 10800 - 3 E. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will permit rigid, tamperproof, and theftproof installation, as follows: 1. One-piece, galvanized -steel, wall -hanger device with spring -action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. 2. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. F. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level and firmly anchored. B. Install toilet accessory units in locations and heights indicated, and if not indicated, as directed by Architect. All mounting locations and heights shall comply with current ADA standards. C. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, according to. manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. D. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 300 lbf, complying with ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations after removing'temporary labels and protective coatings. END OF SECTION 10800 10800 - 4 7 SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Horizontal louver blinds (venetian blinds) shall be provided for the following: 1. At exterior windows where indicated on the Drawings. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blind specified. Include printed data on physical characteristics. C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation details at and relationship to adjoining work. Include elevations indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls. D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of horizontal louver blind indicated. E. Samples for verification of the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected. Prepare samples from the same material to be used for the Work. 1. Louver: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 2. Valance: Manufacturer's standard -size unit, not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. F. Maintenance data for horizontal louver blinds to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to finishes and performance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of horizontal louver blind from one source and by a single manufacturer. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual horizontal louver blind dimensions by accurate field measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. �,.., B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal r' louver blinds until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet -work in space L is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, •and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ., products by one of the following: 1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: a. Bali Classics Custom Mini Blinds. b. Levelor Lorentzen Corp., 1" (25mm) Contract Blinds. C. Hunterpouglas, Inc., Sunflex 1" Aluminum Blinds. _ 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Louvers: Manufacturer's standard as follows: 1. Aluminum. 2. Nominal Louver Width: 1 inch (25 mm) (miniblinds). B. Tilt Operation: Manual with wand. 1. Length of Tilt Control: Full length of blind. 2. Position of Tilt Control: Left side, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tilt: Full. C. Cord -Lock Operation: Cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind. at any position in ascending or descending travel. D. Cord Equalizers: Self -aligning to maintain horizontal louver blind position. E. valance: Match color of louvers. F. Mounting: As indicated or directed. G. Colors and Patterns: As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns for horizontal louver blinds of type indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Product Standard and Description: Comply with AWCMA Document 1029 for each horizontal louver blind unit consisting of louvers, rails, cord locks, tilting mechanisms, tapes, and installation hardware. B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating materials. C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C): 1. Blind Units Installed Between (Inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch (6 mm) per side or ;i inch (12 mm) total, plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than jamb to jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch (6 man), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), less than head to sill dimension of opening in which each blind is installed. D. Hold -Down Brackets: Manufacturer's standard. 12511 - 2 I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of horizontal louver blinds. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior louver edges in any 1position are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to interior face of glass lites. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces, according to manufacturer's instructions, after installation. B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish, and debris resulting from installation. Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use. 3.5 PROTECTION r A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 12511 12511 - 3 F Flo 1. SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.2 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. (` B. All piping and ductwork for the mechanical trade shall be concealed in ! chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. C. Piping and ductwork may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. E. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at -the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. F. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions 15000 - 1 than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. H. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. I. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. J. Piping and ducts serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. K. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. L. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. M. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M" or "P" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.3 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 15000 - 2 R� 1.4 INSPECTION OF SITE r., A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing ? mechanical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. G 1.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING r A. All electric wiring of every character, except for temperature control, will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of r the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the [ drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.6 MOTORS AND CONTROLS , F Mr L A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. 15000 - 3 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. 1.9 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. The Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. 15000 - 4 r D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1.11 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.12 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. "Concealed" areas are those areas which cannot be seen by the building occupants from the floor with all building components in place. G. "Exposed" areas are all areas which are exposed to view by the building occupants, including mechanical rooms. H. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. The Contractor shall exercise F15000 - 5 due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. 1.14 PAINTING A. All painting shall be done by the Contractor under Division 9. Following is a general outline of the required work for Division 15. 1. When the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half flat half enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all surfaces above or behind perforated return air grilles or other open spaced air outlet devices with flat black paint. All pipes, conduits, ductwork and structural members shall be painted. These surfaces shall be painted a distance away from the grille such that no unpainted surfaces are visible to a person standing on the room side and viewing through the device. 1.15 SEALING AROUND PIPES, DUCTS, ETC. A. The Contractor installing pipes, ducts, etc. shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors with Dow Corning No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.16 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. 15000 6 i F r B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.17 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. All presently installed materials including pipes, valves, fittings, fixtures, ducts, etc, that are not to be reused shall be removed by the Contractor under the section in which the particular items normally fall whenever they can be taken out of service. When the work is complete, there shall be no "dead" lines left installed in any portion of the area being remodeled, which shall include any temporary connections. All materials shall become the property of the contractor and removed from the site. 1.18 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.19 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.20 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. F 15000 - 7 1.21 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. _ 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. S. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.22 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer guarantee is hereinafter called for, all work, material and equipment items shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner. All defects in labor and materials occurring during this period, as determined by the Architect, shall be repaired and/or replaced to the complete satisfaction of the Architect. Guarantee shall be in writing and in triplicate. 1.23 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate record drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. END OF SECTION 15000 15000 - 8 r SECTION 15 200 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. r1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. r h 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected ! upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. r PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117 Type II No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 Copper Tubing ASTM B75-76 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 111 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B16.5 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B16.3 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. 15200 - 1 D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Clear Flow fitting designed to meet requirements of ASTM F-492. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. 2.3 VALVES A. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and O-rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 411 and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 61, and larger, provide geared operators. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems of adequate length for the handle to clear the insulation and jacket. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. B. Bald Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be two piece. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems of adequate length for the handle to clear the insulation and jacket. Apollo, .. Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. 2.4 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a 1/4" ball valve on a nipple of sufficient length that the valve handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. Install the nipple in a thredolet connection. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and. tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1/21, dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. Upper range of scale shall be minimum two times greater than expected pressure. D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 2.5 TEST WELLS A. Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. 15200 2 r B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into P place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified 4. grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the Piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING AND SEALANT PANS A. Flash around all pipes passing through flat roofs with sheet lead not less than 2-1/2 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 811 in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. B. Small lines thru flat roofs shall be installed thru sealant pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 811 X 811 or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with sealant. 3.3 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. ! B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches 15200 - 3 above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to 3M No. 2000 fire resistant caulk. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.4 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.5 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions. Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be stainless steel. B. Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is cut and before it is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent leaks is prohibited. C. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square, ream and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with high temperature solid string or wire solder, 95% tin, 5k antimony, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for all copper tubing. Low temperature solder such as 50/50 or 40/60 will not be permitted. 3.6 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 15200 - 4 3.7 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 411 in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.8 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. r END OF SECTION 15200 r t F r r 15200 - 5 i i r a - i SECTION 15210 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS rr PART 1 - GENERAL k. 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE 4 A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". r A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated fat the factory with asphalts or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and Type L copper for lines smaller than 211. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used. r C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines ! underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K soft drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. D. Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they ' shall be concealed behind chrome plated access covers, such as Wade W-8480-R or provided with other special plugs and covers as required to present a finished appearance. Floor cleanouts in unfinished areas shall be Wade W-6000 with threaded adjustable housing, flanged ferrule with cast iron plug and gasket and secured satin bronze scoriated top. Floor cleanouts in finished tile floors shall be Wade �^ W-6000-TS with square tile top; in carpeted areas Wade W-6000-72 with i carpet marker. All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line ' served up to 4" size and shall be 4" for all larger lines. E. Air Chambers: Air chambers of Type L copper, not less than 12" long and no smaller than the supply pipe, shall be provided and installed in each water supply to each and every fixture, outlet, item of equipment, etc. The length and/or the diameter of these air chambers shall be greater where required to eliminate water hammer. PDI shock absorbers may be used if sized in accordance with PDI recommendations. 15210 - 1 € t F. Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker. These vacuum breakers shall be designed.to prevent any possible backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated lines, they shall be chrome plated to match. 2.2 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The plate numbers on the drawings represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the job. Approved equal fixtures of American Standard, Eljer, and Kohler will be acceptable. B. All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps, waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers, goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. C. All threaded supply fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow preventers. D. All fixtures shall have wheelhandle stop valves. E. Generally all wall hung fixtures shall be provided with chair carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall. F. All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance. G. Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in. H. Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as directed by the Architect. I. The Contractor shall verify all rough in heights before installation and shall secure a current ruling on heights of handicapped fixtures before rough in to insure that they meet the requirements of the parties having jurisdiction. J. Controls for flush valves shall be mounted on the wide side of toilet areas. K. All fixtures shall meet State of Texas SB587 water saving performance standards. 2.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE Water Closet WC'A' Bowl Flush valve Seat Eljer 111-1505 water saver, wall hung, elongated bowl, siphon jet, standard 15" height, with closet carrier fitting and chrome mounting bolts. Sloan Royal 113-1.5, 1611 riser. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. 15210 - 2 Water Closet WC'B' Bowl Flush Valve Seat Urinal U'A' Fixture Flush Valve Urinal U'B' Fixture Flush Valve Lavatory L Fixture Supply Tailpiece P-trap Stops & Risers Sink S'A' Fixture Eljer 111-1505 water saver, wall hung, elongated bowl, siphon jet, handicapped height, with closet carrier fitting and chrome mounting bolts. TAS compliant. Sloan Royal 111-11-1/2" riser. TAS compliant. Bemis 1955 SS/CH white solid plastic open front. Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung, siphon jet, with chair carrier, and 3/4" top spud. Mount at 24" height. Sloan Royal 186 Eljer 161-1090 vitreous china, wall hung, siphon jet, with chair carrier, and 3/4" top spud. Mount at 1711 height. TAS compliant. Sloan Royal 186. TAS compliant. Eljer 051-2954, vitreous china 22-1/2" x 18-1/2" self rim, with 4" drillings. TAS compliant. 557-1122, single chrome lever handle aerator. TAS compliant. 803-0530 perforated grid with offset drain. 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Elkay LRAD-3319, 33" x 19-1/2" x 6" deep, double compartment, 18 gauge type 304 self rimming stainless steel with 4 holes. TAS compliant. 15210 - 3 Supply Eljer 717-1280, chrome finish swing spout single lever unit with aerator, hose and spray, "- 3/8" tubing inlets. TAS compliant. Strainer Two Eljer 803-0580 strainer and crumb cup. Tailpiece Eljer 803-0530, offset drain. P-trap Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Stops, risers Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Sink S'B' Fixture Supply Strainer Tailpiece P-trap Stops, risers Electric Water Cooler EWC Fixture P-trap Stop 2.4 DRAINS A. Provide all 'drains as scheduled. Elkay LRAD-1918, 19" x 181, x 6" deep, single compartment, 18 gage type 302 self rimming stainless steel with 3 holes. TAS compliant. Eljer 717-1700, chrome finish swing spout single lever unit with 3/8" tubing inlets. TAS compliant. Eljer 803-0580 strainer and crumb cup. Eljer 803-0530, offset drain. Eljer 804-1190 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome risers and wheel handle stops. Elkay EBFATL-8 bi-level for the handicapped with stainless steel receptors and vinyl clad cabinet. LDAPR-188 apron. TAS compliant. Eljer 804-1180 with tubing waste and escutcheon. Eljer 802-0320 with flexible chrome riser and wheel handle stop. Wade, Josam or Zurn are acceptable. 15210 - 4 `" I B. All floor drains deep seal p-trap. Floor Drain FD'A' Fixture Floor Drain FD'B' Fixture PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES Wade No. W-1103 with 6" NB top, cast iron body. Wade No. W-2374 with square cast iron top, cast iron body, sediment bucket. A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. B. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not.less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. C. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof or to an existing vent. Terminate not less than 10" above the roof. D. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. E. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 3.3 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Hydrostatically test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours. 15 210 - 5 1 3.4 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning,.flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. END OF SECTION 15210 15210 - 6 I t SECTION 15230 - CHILLED WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled water circulating piping complete and connect to coils and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". B. Chilled Water Lines: Type L hard drawn copper pipe assembled with wrought copper fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type M hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. D. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Hoffman No. 78 cast brass body (150 psig) on pipe sizes 3" and smaller; Hoffman No. 792 cast iron body (250 psig) on pipe sizes 4" and larger. Crane and Sarco acceptable. Pipe discharge to a floor drain or as directed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system which may be isolated with the valves shown or required. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed !� as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. f C. Install drains from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Drains are required for sections of circulating systems r which may be isolated with the valves shown or required. Provide any is other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of �. equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. 15230 - 1 Y J 3.2 CLEANING A. Fill the new system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Provide bypass piping and valves as required. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. 3.3 TESTING A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig, whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Architect indicating system condition after initial fill. END OF SECTION 15230 15230 - 2 ( SECTION 15235 - HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. f�f 1.3 SCOPE: t. A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. I. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". j� B. Heating Water Lines: Type L hard drawn g yp copper pipe assembled with i wrought copper fittings. C. Drain Lines: Type M hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. D. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Hoffman No. 78 cast brass body (150 psig) on pipe sizes 3" and smaller; Hoffman No. 792 cast iron body (250 psig) on pipe sizes 4" and larger. Crane and I Sarco acceptable. Pipe discharge to a floor drain or as directed. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS: A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide high automatic air vents at all points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. C. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. t 3.2 CLEANING: A. Fill the new system with a solution consisting of either one pound of �+ caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons g r of water. Provide bypass piping and valves as required. Eliminate r"' 15235 - 1 It all air, heat to operating temperature, and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. 3.3 TESTING: A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all — lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig, whichever is 'greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT: A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment. Provide chemical analysis report to Architect indicating system condition after initial fill. END OF SECTION 15235 15235 - 2 r" t' FSECTION 15260 - REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install the necessary refrigerant lines, fittings, refrigerant controls, etc. to properly interconnect the indoor and outdoor heat pumps. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 PIPING A. Refrigerant piping shall be ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn copper tubing assembled with wrought copper fittings. Braze joints with AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy. Flood system with nitrogen when brazing. 2.2 REFRIGERANT A. When the refrigerant piping systems have been complete, the Contractor shall thoroughly purge the system with dry nitrogen test for leaks, make the systems tight, evacuate to 7mm Hg and fully charge them with Freon refrigerant. Upon completion of the operating tests, he shall replace any refrigerant lost during the test operations, and upon acceptance shall leave the systems fully charged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM A. Piping shall be adequately supported to prevent the transmission of vibration and noise into the building structure. All refrigerant piping shall run in a neat manner parallel to the building construction and shall be arranged with adequate clearance for the suction line insulation. Purge continuously with dry nitrogen while soldering. B. Refrigerant lines shall be sized in accordance with the best refrigeration practice and shall be designed to afford a controlled is distribution of the refrigerant and a ready return of oil to the compressor crankcases. Particular care shall be exercised in the sizing and design of suction lines to assure that liquid refrigerant or oil pockets will not be formed during partial compressor operation with subsequent "slugging". r f 3.2 TESTING ii A. All refrigerant piping shall be tested at 300 psi with dry nitrogen for 4 hours. Finally after charging, go over each installation with a halide torch. Correct all leaks. F15260 - 1 3.3 EVACUATING A. After testing the piping system, evacuate the system to 200 microns. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen to raise the pressure to atmospheric. Re -evacuate the system to 200 microns. Close the vacuum pump suction valve and stop the pump. Backseat the compressor valve and allow the system to stand under vacuum for a minimum of 12 hours. If the vacuum reading remains unchanged, the system may be charged. END OF SECTION 15260 15260 - 2 F. SECTION 15290 - MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. r` B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 1.5 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION r' A. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered ` legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where t pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized. C. Markers shall conform completely with "The Scheme for Identification of Piping System" (ANSI A131 1981). Markers shall have ANSI specified color coded background, color of legend and legend letter size. D. Markers shall be equal to Seton Set Mark Pipe Markers. 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled t numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. r• 15290 - 1 B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. 1.7 MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one corner of the panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and smoke dampers. B. Stencil 1/2" high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers. 1.8 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as ^ shown on the drawings. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces _ and white core. Nameplates shall be secured with stainless steel screws. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. END OF SECTION 15290 15290 - 2 F SECTION 15320 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of ductwork, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ductwork insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in HVAC DUCT CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, First Edition, as published by Sheetmetal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). B. Unless indicated otherwise, all duct shall be constructed in conformance with 1" w.g. pressure class. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1" in 71, on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1" in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10t of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. F. Transverse duct joints 36" and larger shall be made with The Ductmate System or an approved equal. The Ductmate System components shall be of standard catalogue manufacture as supplied by Ductmate Industries, Inc. F 15320 - 1 G. The installation of The Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturers printed instruction and installation manuals. H. The standard Ductmate 35 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate 25 System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "F" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc., shall be as indicated in the addendum to the -- SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. 2.2 DUCT LINER A. All sheet metal supply, return, and fresh air duct shall be lined. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 1" with Mansville "Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with neoprene on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .26 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld _ pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 2" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. E. Use loot adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air and exhaust air ductwork shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. C. Blue Glue or Hardcast will be considered equal. 2.4 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a volume damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off to achieve the final air balance. B. Volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 24". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. 15320 - 2 r Ii i C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 2411, volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall have neoprene blade edges and stainless steel jamb seals. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 1200 right angle worm gear regulator with 301 concealed damper regulator. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. l 2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' !" Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. B. Flex duct shall not exceed 4'-0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. If longer duct is required use round sheetmetal duct with 2" thick duct insulation to make-up the difference in length. r" 2.6 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper and positive locking nut. 2.7 FIRE DAMPERS r� A. Furnish and install, at locations shown on the plans, dynamic fire dampers constructed and tested in accordance with the current edition ' of UL-555 Standard For Fire Dampers. Dampers up to 64 sq. ft. for vertical mount and 25 sq. ft. for horizontal mount shall be r classified for dynamic closure to a minimum 2375 fpm and 4 inches w.g, static pressure for horizontal air flow, air flow up and air ` flow down. Velocity and pressure rating shall include both in duct and no duct installations. B. Each dynamic fire damper shall be marked with a UL classified 1-1/2 hour fire protection rating, the maximum Velocity/pressure rating for each horizontal and vertical installation and "for use in dynamic r., systems." In addition each dynamic fire damper shall include a 165 �^ 15320 - 3 degrees F fusible link. Each dynamic fire damper shall include a 12" long integral roll formed steel sleeve furnished by the damper manufacturer. Submittal informationshall include the fire protection rating, maximum velocity/pressure ratings and the manufacturer's UL installation instructions. C. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Ruskin DIBD 20 -- Style B. 2.7 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining —. and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. C. Access doors shall be located as close as possible to fire dampers and smoke dampers. Where the size of the duct permits, the minimum size access door shall be 18" x 16". D. Each door providing access to fire dampers or smoke damper shall have a label with letters not less than 1/2" in height reading "FIRE DAMPER" or "SMOKE DAMPER" as applicable. 2.8 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. C. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Titus, Metal -Aire, Price, or Krueger will be acceptable. 2.9 VAV BOXES A. The boxes shall be of the single duct type. The damper shall be housed in a 22 gauge galvanized steel housing of leak resistant construction with mechanical seal and with coated 1" thick insulation to resist erosion and to meet NFPA 90A and 90B requirements. Access to the damper and linkage shall be either through the outlet or through an access door. Scribe end of damper rod to indicate damper position. Secure damper linkage with indents and screws or through pins. 15320 4 F F B. Leakage of the casing and the control damper for each box shall be tested, separately, at the factory. The factory shall certify that the test has been made and shall furnish a written report of the results of the leakage test for each unit. The leakage test shall be run at 6" of static pressure and measured according to the Air Diffusion Council Standard Procedure. Leakage for each box casing and for each box damper shall not exceed tabulation herein. NOMINAL BOX CFM CAPACITY CASING LEAKAGE DAMPER LEAKAGE SIZE - INCHES Q 3000 FPM CFM Q 6" SP CFM ® 6" SP 4 260 5 5 5 400 8 8 6 580 12 12 7 800 16 16 8 1000 21 21 9 1300 27 27 10 1600 32 32 11 1980 40 40 12 2350 47 47 C. Where scheduled, the reheat coil shall be constructed of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins. D. The terminal manufacturer shall provide pressure independent analog electronic controls which can be reset to modulate airflow between zero and the maximum cataloged cfm. Maximum airflow limiters are not acceptable. E. The terminal shall incorporate a multi -point, center averaging velocity sensor. A minimum of four measuring ports must be parallel to the take -off point from the sensor. Sensors with measuring ports in series are not acceptable. single -point sensors are not acceptable. The sensor must provide a minimum differential pressure signal of 0.03" wg. at an inlet velocity of 500 fpm. The sensor must provide control signal accuracy of ±5t, with the same inlet size at any inlet condition. F. The velocity controller shall have a constant 2° F reset span regardless of minimum and maximum airflow limits. The controller shall allow all flow adjustments to be made and monitored from the matched thermostat. In addition, the thermostat shall provide a live velocity readout terminal. The thermostat shall have concealed cover latches and temperature setpoint sliders to prevent tampering. Velocity controller and thermostat are by terminal manufacturer. Power consumption of the controller without loads shall not exceed 4 VA. G. Control devices shall be factory set for the scheduled minimum and maximum flow rates. Velocity measuring points will be integral with the thermostat for field balancing airflow. Each terminal shall be equipped with labeling showing unit location, size, and minimum and maximum cfm setpoints. H. Terminal manufacturer shall provide a 24 Vac reversible damper actuator. The actuator shall be a direct -coupled, shaft -mounted type without external linkages. A magnetic clutch and linkage release button shall be integral to the actuator. Stall type or DC actuators without current limiting are not acceptable. The damper shall be factory set in an open position. Power consumption of the actuator shall not exceed 4 VA. 15320 - 5 I. The termainal manufacturer shall provide a Class 2, 24 Vac control voltage transformer with internal current limiting protection. All controls shall be installed in approved NEMA 1 enclosure. All components must be compatible for use with grounded control circuits per UL 1995. J. See Section 15700 for sequence of operation. K. The box shall be as manufactured by Titus. END OF SECTION 15320 15320 - 6 i F SECTION 15330 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Wall bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter Size of Steel Pipe or Size of Cast Iron Copper Tube Supported Pipe Supported 3/8" 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and smaller 1/2" 3" and 4" 4" through 6" 5/8" l 5" through 8" 8" through 10" 3/4" 1011 and larger 12" and larger 15330 - 1 2.3 HANGER SPACING A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. Locate a hanger within 12 inches of every elbow or tee. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper and steel lines. However, hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or required by code. Size of Line Hanger Spacing in Feet 3/4" and smaller 5 1" through 1-1/2" 7 2" and larger 10 All cast iron lines 5 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 1010" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes run under steel construction, use beam clamps on beams. Under steel joists, piping may be suspended from rods thru the bottom chord with washers and double nuts. On piping larger than 411, verify the joist strength before installation. G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall each be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. H. Perforated strap iron and wire will under no circumstances be acceptable as hanger material. 15330 - 2 3.2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION 15330 15330 - 3 7 F F 7 r F SECTION 15400 - INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be one of the following: 1. An All Service Jacket (ASJ) laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper, glass scrim reinforcement, and kraft paper. 2. Foil Reinforced Kraft (FRK) Jacket laminated of flame resistant 0.0011, aluminum foil, glass scrim reinforcement and kraft paper. B. where specified, insulate valves and fittings with Hamfab or approved equal molded glass fiber fitting covers equal in thickness to the adjoining pipe covering, vapor sealed with two 1/8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic equal to Benjamin Foster No. 65-07 reinforced with an open mesh glass fabric. Finish with preformed Manville Zeston PVC covers with taped seams. 15400 - 1 C. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with two fiberglass inserts and preformed Manville Zeston covers with taped seams. 2.3 SHIELDS A. Provide shield of No. 16 U.S. standard gage galvanized metal to protect insulation at hangers and supports on piping 3 inches and _ smaller. For pipe 4 to 6 inches, use 14 gage; and for pipe 8 inches and larger, use 12 gage. Use a shield extending at least 6 inches on each side of the support bearing area. B. Under each shield on pipe 2" and larger, install a high density fiberglass insert equal to Hamfab H Block, 20 lb. density, or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams with a double tape, — self-sealing lap, adhesive system. If a single tape, self-sealing lap, adhesive system is used, an additional layer of Benjamin Foster 82-07 vapor barrier lap adhesive must be used. Tightly butt the ends of the pipe covering and apply the 4" wide butt strips as provided by the insulation manufacturer. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. C. Chilled water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to -- Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be 1-1/21, thick. Insulate concealed valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. Vapor seal all insulation. D. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jacket (ASJ) equal to Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II. Insulation shall be _ 15400 - 2 F 1" thick. Insulate concealed valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zestonll PVC covers. Insulate exposed valves and r fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. LE. Domestic Hot Water and Circulating Lines: Insulate with 1" thick Owens-Corning Fiberglas ASJ/SSL-II molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with an All Service jacket (ASJ). Insulate concealed valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston" PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. F. Domestic Cold Water Lines: Insulate with 1/2" thick Owens-Corning ASJ/SSL-II molded glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied All Service Jackets (ASJ). Insulate concealed valves and fittings with preformed "Zeston' PVC covers over fiberglass insulation. Insulate exposed valves and fittings with Hamfab insulation fittings. Vapor seal all insulation. G. Ducts: Insulate the round sheetmetal supply air ducts with 211 thick, 3/4 lb. density, Owens-Corning "All Service Wrap" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. H. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. I. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. J. Refrigeration Suction Piping: 3/411 Manville Type II "Aerotube" threaded onto piping during fabrication and sealed with adhesive. END OF SECTION 15400 15400 - 3 ( F FSECTION 15500 - EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - No. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: B. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. C. Fractional 1/6 HP and Larger: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. D. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 7 15500 - 1 E. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Motors shall have the minimum performance as scheduled below. HP RPM FRAME MIN EFF MIN POWER FACTOR 1 1800 143T82 84 1-1/2 1800 145T 84 85 2 1800 145T 84 85 3 1800 182T 86 86 5 1800 184T 87 87 7-1/2 1800 213T 88 86 10 1800 215T 89 85 15 1800 256T 91 85 20 1800 256T 91 86 2.2 STARTERS A. Starters, except those furnished as an integral part of the equipment as specified herein, shall be furnished by the Contractor under Division 16. Coordinate exact starter requirements and details. 2.3 FANS A. The fans indicated on the drawings shall be provided in accordance with the schedule on the drawings. B. All v-belt drives shall be a variable pitch type and shall be so selected that the specified fan performance occurs at approximately the midpoint of the adjustable range. Motor mounting shall be flexible to permit belt tightening. The static pressure tabulated in the schedule is for bidding purposes only. The fan shall be adjusted to achieve the air delivery specified and if changing of the motor and drive is required it shall be done at no increase in the contract. C. Motor and Drive: The motor shall be open drip proof NEMA T frame design to meet horsepower and electrical requirements specified. The adjustable v-belt drive shall be selected for a 1.4 service factor based on motor horsepower and shall be factory set for the specified rpm. The motor shall be mounted for alignment and tensioning the belts. Conduit shall be flexible. D. Provide isolators and flexible duct connections with each fan to limit the transmission of noise and vibration. E. Fans shall be AMCA rated as scheduled. F. Fans shall be furnished with backdraft dampers and disconnect. G. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced. H. Fans shall have factory applied finish. I. Ceiling Exhaust Fans: Unitary exhaust fans shall be as scheduled on the drawings. They shall be centrifugal, direct driven fans in a sound insulated sheet metal housing for installation above the ceiling. There shall be a finished integral metallic grille for each unit. Provide a backdraft damper, duct thru the roof and suitable rain cap for each. Fans shall be Penn, Greenheck, or equal. 15500 - 2 f I! r J. Power Roof Ventilators: All roof mounted exhaust fans shall be of the low silhouette type with fan wheels mounted horizontally. All fan housings shall be corrosion resistant construction. All fans shall be equipped with ball bearings, permanently lubricated. Fans shall be resiliently mounted. K. Exhaust fans shall have backward inclined centrifugal wheels. L. All fans shall have bird screens. M. Curbs shall be factory fabricated and furnished with the unit. It shall be of welded construction. N. Exhaust fans shall be as manufactured by Cook, Penn Ventilator, Acme or Greenheck. O. Cabinet Fan: Duct mounted fans shall be of the centrifugal, belt driven in -line type. The fan housing shall be of the rectangular design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include rectangular duct mounting collars. P. A hinged or removable panel shall be provided in the fan cabinet of sufficient size to permit access for service to all of the fan's internal components without dismantling the cabinet. Q. The fan wheel shall be of the galvanized steel, forward curved, centrifugal type. wheels shall be dynamically and statically balanced. R. Motors shall be of the heavy duty type with permanently sealed ball bearings. The wheel shaft shall be ground and polished steel mounted in permanently sealed pillow block bearings. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150k of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts. The motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing. S. All fans shall be furnished with neoprene vibration isolators. T. Fans shall be manufactured by Greenheck or Cook. 2.4 AIR UNIT, DRAW THROUGH A. Air unit shall be of the sectionalized, factory assembled standard catalogued medium pressure type as manufactured by Trane, Temtrol, York, McQuay or Carrier. Unit shall be of the vertical draw through type. Refer to schedule on drawings. B. The sections which constitute the completed air conditioning unit shall each be assembled at the factory in a sheet metal housing appropriately finished, and shipped as a unit. They shall be assembled on the job into complete units having physical and performance characteristics as detailed and scheduled, suitable for application at minimum 6" w.g. static pressure. C. Unit Casing: Unit shall be constructed of a complete frame with removable panels. Removal of side panels must not affect the structural integrity of each module. All exterior wall panels shall be made of minimum 18-gauge steel. Closed cell foam gasketing shall be applied where modules are joined. D. Units shall have an insulated, double wall stainless steel drain pan under coil section for drainage of condensate. Drain connections are r to be provided on both sides of the unit. t �'" 15500 - 3 E. Full sized double wall access doors with Ventlock handles shall be provided to the interior of the unit casing where shown on the drawings. Access doors on both sides of the unit shall be provided in the fan section. Fan access door interlock switches shall be wired under Section 15700. F. Casing shall be gasketed air tight and water tight. G. All unit components shall be insulated. H. Fan: Fan shall be of the forward curve type. Performance shall be certified as complying with ARI Standard 430. I. Fan shaft shall be selected to operate at a speed 30t or more below its first critical speed. The rotating assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced. When the unit is running there shall be no visible deflection of any panel and no noise of metal to metal contact. If, in the judgement of the Architect, objectionable noise or vibration is observed, the units shall be aligned and dynamically balanced on the job by a factory mechanic to industrial tolerances, at no additional cost. Balancing method and tolerances shall be approved by the Architect. Any defective component shall be replaced. J. Fan scrolls and wheels shall be designed as a unit with smooth belled inlet and adjustable cut-off. Fan wheel shall be keyed to the shaft and shall be removable. K. Bearings shall be ball or roller type rated for 200,000 hour life. Bearing shall be bolted to structural bearing supports. Extend copper lube lines to a common convenient point. Each fan shaft shall have two bearings only. L. Motor and Drive: Motor shall be not less than the horsepower scheduled, 1750 RPM, high efficiency, dripproof. Drive shall be selected for 120% of. the maximum motor horsepower. Provide an adjustable drive, selected for the RPM of the fan with 10% adjustment above and below the selected speed. M. The motor shall be installed on adjustable rails or cradle to permit belt tensioning and alignment. Provide flexible conduit for wiring the motor. N. Motor shall be internally mounted. O. Chilled Water Cooling Coil: ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fins, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 300 psig. Headers shall be copper. Waterflow shall be counterflow to airflow. Tubes shall be 5/8" O.D., 6 row (minimum). P. Heating Water Coil: Where scheduled, ARI certified water tube type with copper tubes and aluminum fires, mechanically bonded, pressure tested at 300 psig. Waterflow shall be counterflow to airflow. Tubes shall be 5/81, O.D. Q. Insulation: The entire unit shall be internally insulated with 1" thick 1-1/2 lb. neoprene coated fiberglass. R. Vibration Isolators: Spring type, with neoprene pad base, and stop. Static deflection shall be 111. The fan shall be isolated .from the unit casing. S. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: Low leakage return air and outside air dampers with edge and jamb seals. Return damper and outside air damper shall be linked for automatic operation. Filter shall be 2" thick Farr 30/30. Furnish three sets. 15500 - 4 B. 7 r i' HEAT PUMP - SPLIT SYSTEM Inside Unit: 1. Furnish and install where shown on the plans direct expansion fan coils equipped with electric heater either packaged or assembled from separate sections. Unit shall operate properly in vertical upflow position and is to be installed with ductwork. Capacities shall be as scheduled. 2. Unit enclosure shall be insulated and constructed of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with baked enamel. Large front service access panels shall provide easy access to all components. Reversible filter rack shall have duct connection flanges and be equipped with permanent type filter that slides out for maintenance. 3. Fan shall be forward curved with double inlet, mounted on motor shaft, dynamically and statically balanced. The fan shall deliver scheduled cfm with required external static pressure. The multi -speed fan motor shall be factory lubricated, have internal overload protection and be resiliently mounted. Fan motor assembly shall slide out for service. 4. Cooling coil shall be constructed with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to nonferrous tubing with all joints brazed. Coil shall have factory installed; refrigerant metering device; refrigerant line fittings which permit mechanical connections; 2 condensate pans with primary and auxiliary drain connections on each. 5. Electric heater shall be factory installed. All heaters shall be equipped with both thermal and current overload devices, and the required heating and cooling system controls including control circuit 24v transformer. Outdoor Unit: 1. Furnish and install an air to air electric heat pump designed and tested for use with Refrigerant 22 and contain sufficient charge (R-22) for complete system. Brass service valves with refrigerant line fittings and service ports shall be located on exterior of unit. 2. Nominal unit electrical characteristics shall be as scheduled. 3. Total cooling capacity shall not be less than scheduled. Unit energy efficiency ratio (SEER) shall be as scheduled or more at ARI conditions. 4. Outdoor coil shall have aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. Coil shall be protected by vinyl coated grille. Factory installed coil refrigerant metering device shall be mounted on unit liquid service valve. Metering device internal components shall be removable for cleaning or replacement. 5. Outdoor unit fan shall be propeller type, direct driven, and arranged for vertical air discharge. Fan motor shall be factory lubricated, inherently protected and resiliently mounted. 6. Compressor shall be of the welded hermetic type with internal vibration isolation and be covered with a shield to muffle operating sound. Compressor motor shall have both thermal and r� 15500 - 5 current sensitive overload device, and start assist device shall be standard on 1 phase units if required. Compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater and have internal high pressure protection. 7. Controls shall be factory wired and located in a readily accessible location on unit swing out service door. Controls and protective devices shall include a liquid line low pressure switch, suction line accumulator and pressure relief device. An automatic defrost control shall be included to accomplish defrosting (only if coil saturated suction temperature indicated freezing temperatures) every 90 minutes for a period of not more than 10 minutes. Control wiring terminal board shall be designed to match indoor unit terminal board and accessory thermostat terminals for standardized point to point connection. 8. Accessories shall include Honeywell T7300 indoor thermostat, outdoor thermostat, emergency heat relay, solid state time guard, service sentry, optimizer control, start capacitor and relay, coupler and liquid line filter dryer. END OF SECTION 15500 15500 - 6 F FSECTION 15600 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. PRO 2. Attached forms completed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. r Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. r 15600 - 1 J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A.. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 15600 15600 - 2 Project Name Date Page -of - AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT TEST SHEET SYSTEM Equipment Location Area Served Equipment Manufacturer Model Serial Number Specified Actual Specified Actual Total CFM — Fan Total CFM — Outlet RfA CFM 01A CFM Total Static Pressure (Total/External) Inlet Pressure scharge Pressure FFan RPM % w \\ 1" p Actual Specified Actual Motor Manufacturer Motor HP15HP Phase Pottage Amperage Motor RPM Motor Service Factor Starter Heater Elements Motor Sheave & No. Grooves Fan Sheave & No. Grooves Belts Remarks Date Page -of - Project _ COOLING COIL DATA System Location Service Manufacturer Design Actual Design Actual Design Actual Design . Actual CFM GPM Coil P.D., FT. E.W.T., °F L.W.T., °F E.A.T., DB °F E.A.T., WB °F L.A.T., DB °F L.A.T., WB °F Remarks: /In Date Page of Project Name STATIC PRESSURE PROFILE E a E b v ca rev Date Page -of - Project Name EXHAUST FAN DATA SHEET SYSTEM Equipment Location Area Served Equipment Manufacturer Model Serial Number Specified Actual Specified Actual Total CFM - Fan Total CFM - Outlet Total Static Pressure* (Total/External) <' Inlet Pressure Discharge Pressure Fan RPM .��1.�W. Spe i Actual Specified Actual Motor Manufacturer Motor HPIBHP ' Phase Voltage Amperage Motor RPM Motor Service Factor Starter Heater Elements Motor Sheave & No. Grooves Fan Sheave & No. Grooves Belts 'Not always required or applicable. Remarks 1p Project System AIR DISTRIBUTION TEST SHEET Date Page -of - Nrnal•.. mb r ., ® TM-.. CFM ��®��■s��®sue Remarks I Date Page -of - Project TERMINAL UNITS System Manufacturer CONSTANT VARIABLE SINGLE DUAL Remarks Project PUMP DATA SHEET PUMP NO. MANUFACTURER SIZE IMPELLER SERVICE TEST DATA GPM FT. HD. BHP DESIGN ACTUAL DISCHARGE SUCTION AP x2.31 = BLOCK OFF DISCHARGE SUCTION AP x2.31 = FT. HD. MOTOR MFG. FRAME H.P. RPM AMPS ACT: VOLTS ACT: REMARKS Date Page of PUMP NO. MANUFACTURER SIZE IMPELLER SERVICE TEST DATA GPM FT. HD. BHP DESIGN ACTU DIS C x2.31 = FT. HD. BLOCK OFF DISCHARGE SUCTION AP x2.31 = FT. HD. MOTOR MFG. FRAME H.P. RPM AMPS ACT: VOLTS ACT: REMARKS r is SECTION 15700 - TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. I 1.2 SUBMITTALS l' A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include r., system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. In general, it is intended that the system be pneumatic in its operation. It shall include all thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. B. The conduit and wiring for temperature regulation shall originate in a terminal board and extend to and connect to all relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Temperature Control Subcontractor. All electrical work shall comply with Division 16. C. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. D. Temperature regulation specified herein is based on Honeywell, Siebe, or Johnson Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSED AIR t A. The existing air compressor will be reused to provide control air. This Contractor shall begin at the existing air line, connect to the service and extend it according to the various requirements cited by, •"' and inherent to, the descriptions herein. A manual valve shall be provided to allow isolation of the building from the service. Verify the location of the existing air line. 2.2 PIPING A. All exposed tubing and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure and shall be concealed in all r+ finished spaces. Tubing may be run exposed in mechanical rooms or areas where other piping is exposed. B. Hard drawn copper tubing shall be used where run exposed. Only tool -made bends will be acceptable. Fittings for copper tubing shall be brass or copper solder -joint type, except at connections to apparatus, where brass compression -type fittings shall be used. 15700 - 1 C. Non-metallic tubing may be used in concealed locations, inside control cabinets and for flexibility (24" maximum) to make final terminations. Tubing shall be virgin polyethylene, meeting stress -crack test ASTM D1693-60T. Tubing shall be self -extinguishing under ASTM-D635 flammability test. D. Where non-metallic tubing is used inside control cabinets, it shall be number -coded and control cabinets and neatly tied and supported. Flexible connections bridging the cabinet and its door shall be neatly fastened along the hinge -side and protected against abrasion. E. Single lines in equipment rooms shall be hard drawn copper. Short run final terminations shall be made in flexible polyethylene. F. Jacketed multitube instrument harness may be used where a number of tubes are to be run together. Single polyethylene tubing may be used in concealed areas. 2.3 GAUGES A. Provide and install two inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent tag or label indicating to which operator they apply. 2.4 THERMOSTATS A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting two pipe type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished areas shall have plain } cases and concealed adjustments unless specifically described otherwise herein. D. The interrelationship of reset schedule of all submaster instruments shall be job -adjustable and capable of broad ranges of specific r value. E. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the operation of any instrument would be improved by changing its location, he shall so notify the Architect. With the Architect's approval, he shall install the thermostat in the location of his choice. 2.5 SAFETY LOW LIMIT THERMOSTAT A. Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest (one) 1 foot section of its length. 2.6 CONTROL VALVES, WATER A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. 15700 - 2 r t 2.7 B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 41, and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. valves shall have stainless -steel stems and spring -loaded teflon packing. C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. C. Where critical application controllers are used, or where actuators are controlled from pressure sensors, pilot positioners shall be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 3.2 ELECTRICAL INTERLOCKS A. All electrical interlocks shall be provided as specified. B. All electrical interlocks shall be made by means of motor starters or shall be accomplished by separate relays. No motor power lead shall be utilized in an interlock circuit. All interlocked starters with disconnect switches shall be provided with auxiliary contacts on the disconnect switch so that interlocking circuits are interrupted when the disconnect switch in thrown to the OFF position. C. This contractor shall submit wiring diagrams for his equipment which when approved will become installation drawings. These diagrams shall show all interlock circuits and shall relate such diagrams of internal wiring of equipment items as are furnished by the manufacturers of that equipment of the system as a whole. SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. B. Air Unit, Single Zone: 1. The air unit is of the horizontal draw through configuration. The unit manufacturer will furnish a heating water coil, chilled water coil, return air damper, and outside air damper. 2. When the fan starts, the outside air damper shall open. when the fan stops, the outside air damper shall close. 3. Furnish the heating water coil and chilled water coil with a- way modulating valves in the coil outlets. A wall mounted pneumatic thermostat shall modulate the valves in sequence to maintain setpoint temperature. 7 15700 - 3 4. A low limit thermostat in the heating coil inlet shall stop the fan, close the outside air damper, and open the heating water coil and chilled water coil valves fall open to the respective coils. 5. See Division 16 for smoke detection. C. VAV Reheat Terminals: 1. The VAV reheat manufacturer will furnish an electronic thermostat. The Contractor shall furnish a 24 volt two position hot water 3-way valve. 2. When the supply duct temperature is below 77' F, the unit is operating in the cooling mode. As the room temperature _ increases, the room thermostat modulates the cold air flow from the minimum to the maximum setting. A decrease in room temperature will cause the damper to modulate to the minimum CFM position. ` 3. If the supply duct temperature is above 770 F, the unit is operating in the heating mode. A decrease in room temperature will cause the damper to modulate open to the maximum cfm position. A continued decrease in room temperature will cause the 3-way valve to open to the coil. On a rise in temperature, the 3-way valve will bypass the coil. On a continued rise in room temperature, the damper to modulate to the minimum CFM position. D. VAV Terminal: Same as VAV Reheat Terminal except without reheat valve control. 3.3 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the ` preventive maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under — operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence. B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory -` representatives under direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall provide two six -hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. An additional six -hour instruction period shall be given at the beginning of the next heating or cooling season. C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings, typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble each set in a hard cover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and binding. 3.4 GUARANTEE A. The temperature regulation subcontractor shall guarantee all workmanship and material in the temperature regulation system for a period of one year, such guarantee dating from the date of the final acceptance of the entire air conditioning system by the Architect. 15700 - 4 SECTION 16000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR ELECTRICAL I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 ELECTRICAL LINES A. General: In general, the electrical lines to be installed under these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of electrical lines and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate w deviating from these standards. B. General Construction: The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. C. Field Conditions: The electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of electrical lines, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. D. Locations of Electrical Devices: The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. E. Space Requirements: The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. F. Working Drawings: The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect 16000 - 1 before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. G. Order of Precedence: Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The installation shall be coordinated with the work of all other trades. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. H. Equipment Connections: Conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. I. Exceptions and Inconsistencies: Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. J. Intent of Drawings and Specifications: The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. K. Examination of Drawings and Specifications: Each bidder shall examine the Drawings and Specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective Electrical drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.3 DIMENSIONS: A. General: Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.4 INSPECTION OF SITE: A. General: The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply 16000 - 2 with this shall not constitute rounds for any additional payments in 9 P Ym connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing r• installations and/or installing any new work. 1.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING: A. Description: All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under 'Division 16 of these specifications. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.6 PROGRESS OF WORK: A. General: The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS: A. General: All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.8 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP: A. Materials: All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects and undamaged. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inca and shall bear their label. B. Samples: The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. C. Transportation: The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. D. Appurtenances: The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. r E. Workmanship: The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest 1 grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice ! of the trade. r•+ 1.9 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS: A. General: The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. re This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the r16000 - 3 l covering of apparatus in the uncompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.10 PERMITS, FEE, ETC.: A. General: The Contractor under, each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including electric services. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.11 TESTING: A. General: The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as.specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.12 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES: A. General: All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.13 TERMINOLOGY: A. "Furnish, Provide, Install".: Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install', and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Materials: Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. "Shall": The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. — D. "Section": "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "Project": "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. Multiple Items: In describing the various items of equipment, in _ general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 16000 - 4 r fig" l• 1.14 COOPERATION: A. General: The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. 1.15 COORDINATION OF TRADES: A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Ceiling Mounted Items: Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. C. Electrical Items: All items specified under Divisions 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1" 1C 1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING: A. General: The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut r all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. i. B. Structural Members: No cutting shall be done to any of the structural �- members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. Patching: The Contractor for work under each section shall be r- responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Coordination: Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and B coordinate the cutting and patching required with all trades. E. Existing Surfaces: In all spaces where new work under Division 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F16000 - 5 F. Masonry Walls: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.17 PAINTING: A. Painting for Division 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal is visible. 1.18 LARGE APPARATUS: A. General: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. 1.19 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS: A. General: There are portions of the existing electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.20 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS: A. General: It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. These drawings shall be used in the field for the 'actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.21 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT: A. General: The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. 16000 - 6 The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required L L equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Discrepancies: Should any of the equipment furnished require r. connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional rpayment I: to the Contractor. END OF SECTION 16000 i 4 . f r r.. r t 16000 - 7 r JP^ f SECTION 16060 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT: A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Field Measurements: Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. t B. Abandoned Circuits: Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Field Conditions: Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. Report discrepancies to Owner and Architect/Engineer before disturbing existing installation. D. Existing Conditions: Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION: F A. Demolition: Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. r B. Utility Coordination: Coordinate utility service outages with Utility 4 Company. �. C. Temporary Wiring: Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until k. new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and E connections. Notify Owner at least 48 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 6 F. Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner and Telephone Utility Company at least 48 r F16060 - 1 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK: A. General: Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of the Drawings, General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections. B. New Construction: Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. C. Abandoned wiring: Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D. Exposed Conduit: Remove exposed abandoned conduit,including abandoned ^' conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E. Abandoned Devices: Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. -' Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets which are not removed. F. Abandoned Panelboards: Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment. G. Abandoned Equipment: Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. H. Abandoned Lighting Fixtures: Disconnect and remove abandoned lighting fixtures. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other accessories. I. Adjacent Construction: Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. r-. J. Existing wiring to remain active: Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. K. Extension of existing wiring: Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations, as specified. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR: A. Existing Materials: Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. C. Lighting Fixtures: Remove existing lighting fixtures for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps and broken electrical parts. D. Ballasts: Replace the ballasts in all existing lighting fixtures with new ballasts as specified under Section 16500 - LIGHTING. 16060 - 2 3.5 INSTALLATION: A. Relocated Materials: Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of the Specifications. END OF SECTION 16060 16060 - 3 I P ISECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on all conduit, conduit fittings, raceway, outlet boxes, pull boxes and junction boxes. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical raceways, conduit., wireways, pull and junction boxes and outlet boxes, together with all fittings, supporting devices, and other accessories required. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of.ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable. State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle products under provisions of the General Requirements. Accept delivery of conduit, raceway, pull and junction and outlet boxes on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect conduit and raceway from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Routing of Conduit: Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. The contractor shall verify all site conditions and shall route as required to complete the wiring system. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUITS: A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent. B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy, Allied or approved equivalent. C. Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips (commercial Greenfield) or interlocked aluminum construction; conforming to UL Standard UL 1 and UL listed and labeled; Triangle Conduit and Cable Company, or approved equivalent. D. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound with hot dip galvanized steel strips or interlocked aluminum construction as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit liquidtight; UL listed and labeled; Electri- flex type "LA" or approved equivalent. E. PVC Conduit: Type 80 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent. 2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS: A. Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made steel threaded couplings conforming to ANSI/NEMA FB1; bushing at all boxes ^ and cabinets, with locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet. B. Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing (Compression and Set Screw Couplings): Join lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. otherwise use steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. Couplings shall conform to ANSI/NEMA FB1. The connectors shall have insulated throats so as to not damage the insulation during wire pulling operations. C. Couplings and Terminations for Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FB1; T & B 440 Series or approved equivalent couplings at -- connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 3110 or 3130 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors at box or cabinet terminations. D. Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Conforming to ANSI/NEMA FB1; T & B 5271 Series or approved equivalent adapters at connections between flexible and rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series or approved equivalent nylon insulated throat, steel connectors _. at box or cabinet terminations. E. Couplings and Terminations for PVC Conduit: Type 80 heavy wall, high impact rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) fittings, conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for direct burial use; Carlon or approved equivalent. PVC couplings and solvent cement by the same manufacturer as the PVC conduit. 16110 - 2 F 2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS IN CONDUIT: A. Description: Provide conduit expansion joints with internal ground and external bonding jumper, 0-Z Type AX or approved equivalent. 2.4 WIREWAYS: A. Interior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; screw covers; complete with all fittings, couplings, hangers and accessories; Square D, General Electric, or approved equivalent. B. Exterior Use: UL listed; enamel finished; sizes shown or required; removable front cover which is gasketed; weatherproof rainhood. 2.5 OUTLET BOXES: A. General: Outlet boxes shall be UL listed of sizes and types specified. B. Sheet Steel Boxes: NEMA OS 1, sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City, Appleton or approved equivalent. C. Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA FB1, cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs; Crouse -Hinds, Appleton, Pyle National or approved equivalent. 2.6 PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Description: Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers. B. Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100 cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes. C. Larger Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100 cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboards cabinets with covers of the same gauge as cabinets, secured with corrosion resistant bolts or screws. 2.7 SURFACE RACEWAY: A. Surface Raceway: Galvanized Steel with snap on covers, UL listed and sized as shown on the Drawings. Finish surface raceway with all fittings, couplings, hangers, boxes and accessories as required for a complete installation. The surface raceway shall be finished in the manufacturer's standard buff finish. As manufactured by Wiremold, Walker/Parkersburg or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. General: Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes and enclosures for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRING METHODS: A. Description: All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. r- 16110 - 3 3.3 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS: A. Underground Installations: 1. Type: Schedule 80 PVC conduit. 2. In or under slab on grade: Schedule 80 PVC conduit. 3. Minimum size: 3/4 inch. B. Outdoor Locations Above Grade: 1. Type: Rigid steel conduit. 2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. C. Wet and Damp Locations: �. 1. Type: Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. D. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed within 6 feet of finished floor: Rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. 3. Exposed above 6 feet of finished floor where not subject to mechanical damage: Rigid steel -conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 4. Minimum size: 1/2 inch. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS: A. Installation: Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard Of Installation." Install raceways, boxes and enclosures according to the manufacturer's written instructions. B. Conduits: All exposed runs shall be installed level and square and at proper elevations, parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. Provide adequate headroom. C. Bends: Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Conduit Bodies: Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction. E. Expansion Joints: Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansions and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. F. Completion: Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. G. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Sizes of conduits shown on the drawings are minimum sizes to be installed. H. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12 inches long and not more than 24 inches long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 16110 - 4 7 3.5 F Connections to Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Use maximum of 6 feet flexible metal conduit at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. J. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within twelve inches of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least six inches from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. K. Damp or Wet Locations: In damp or wet locations make every effort to avoid installing raceways in a manner which will create moisture traps. Where they must be so installed, seal both ends of raceways with an approved sealing compound to prevent "breathing" and moisture condensation within the raceways. L. Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction to prevent foreign matter from entering raceway. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. M. Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of the raceway and the building material to prevent passage of air, water, smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive and, in general, similar to the basic building materials through which the raceway passes. N. Roof Penetrations: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. O. Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway, not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring. Lines shall be free from splices and shall have not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull line. Identify each end of each line with a linen tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds. JOINING AND TERMINATING CONDUITS: A. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. B. Joining Electrical Metallic Tubing: Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de -burr cut ends. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and fasten securely. C. Joining PVC Conduit: Join PVC conduit using cement as recommended by the manufacturer. Wipe PVC conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for twenty minutes, minimum. D. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the raceway to enter squarely, and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made 16110 - 5 secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipples so no threads are exposed. 3.6 TELEPHONE AND DATA CABLE RACEWAYS: A. 2-inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to the above requirements, install in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90 degree bends or equivalent. Install pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. 3.7 CONDUIT SUPPORTS: A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1,-1/4" and larger on galvanized steel hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment of conduit during wire installation. D. Above Non -removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. E. Above Removable Ceilings: Where conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. F. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut or approved equal angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. Group related conduits together. Provide space on each rack for 25 percent additional conduit. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES: A. Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install in locations as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. B. Boxes recessed in construction: Sheet steel boxes. 16110 - 6 I r 0 F 7 C. For Lighting Fixture Outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface mounted, wall mounted or suspended. D. For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 411x4l' size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. E. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/81, deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires a smaller box. F. Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes. Use cast fully adjustable floor boxes -for installations in slab on grade. G. Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to weather and wet locations. H. Location of boxes: Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated or specified in section for outlet device. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. I. Orientation of Boxes: Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140 - WIRING DEVICES. J. Above Accessible Ceilings: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed lighting fixture. Locate outlet boxes to allow lighting fixtures positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. K. Fire Resistance: Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified. L. Coordination: Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. M. Adjacent Devices: Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. N. Masonry Boxes: Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Wall Boxes: Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. P. Ceiling Boxes: Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. Do not fasten to ceiling support wires or ceiling panels. Support boxes independently of conduit. Q. Gang Boxes: Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. F 16110 - 7 3.9 INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC, using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so indicate. B. Mounting:. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with finished surfaces for access. 3.10 IDENTIFICATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Branch Circuits: Each pull and junction box shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicate the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. B. Emergency Systems: Each pull and junction box serving emergency circuits shall be painted red and shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. The label shall indicated the panel and circuit number of the wiring contained. C. Other System: Boxes serving other systems shall be labeled with indelible ink to indicate the wiring contained inside the box. Identify the wiring system by name (Fire Alarm, P.A., Telephone, Data Cable, Nurse Call, Security, Closed-circuit TV, Etc.). 3.11 INSTALLATION OF SURFACE RACEWAYS: A. General: Surface raceway shall be installed parallel to the wall line in a neat and orderly manner. The surface raceway shall be mounted using only such fasteners that are recommended by the manufacturer for the type of surface material encountered. Paint raceway to match surface installation. B. Usage: Surface raceways and boxes shall be installed on all existing inaccessible walls where concealed conduit is not possible. All raceways and boxes shall be painted to match existing wall conditions. END OF SECTION 16110 16110 - 8 FSECTION 16120 - CONDUCTORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data on conductor and insulation materials. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include the furnishing of all conductors, together with all splices, connections, terminations and identification for wiring systems rated 600 volts and less. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Routing of Wire and Cable: Wire and cable routing shown on the Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section, free from flaws, scale and other imperfections. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10 and smaller shall be solid. B. Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type THHN or THWN-2 insulation, temperature rated 90 degrees C, unless the type is specifically designated or specified. Service feeders shall be type THWN-2. Feeder circuits shall be Type THWN-2. 16120 - 1 C. Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type THHN or THWN-2 conductors, temperature rated 90 degrees C, for wiring in proximity to boilers, and for motors and devices subject to high temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or radiant heat. D. Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved by the NEC for the purpose. E. Manufacturers: Okonite, Triangle, Anaconda, Simplex or approved equivalent. 2.2 JOINTS AND SPLICES: A. Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors or compression connectors. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable. B. Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors make. All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors are not acceptable. _ 2.3 COLOR CODING: A. General: Use standardized color -coding of conductors throughout. All color coding shall be continuous for the entire length of the conductors, and shall be permanent and readily distinguished after installation. in where the specified colors of insulated wire and cable are unavailable, such conductors shall be color -coded, as specified above, by means of slip-on colored plastic sleeves or plastic tape at all pull boxes, support boxes, outlet boxes, panelboards, and other terminal and splicing points. B. Neutral and Grounding Conductors: Neutral conductors shall be white or natural grey. Grounding conductors shall be green, or green with one or more yellow stripes. C. 208 Volt System: Phase conductors shall be black, red and blue for phases, A, B, and C respectively in the 208 volt system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. General: Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with -installation tolerances and other conditions. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 WIRE PULLING: A. Preparation: Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire. Pull no conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause injury to conductors is completed. B. Pulling Lines: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. C. Multiple Wires in a Raceway: All conductors to be installed in a — single conduit shall be pulled in simultaneously. 16120 - 2 F D. Cable Lubricant: Use an Underwriters' listed cable pulling compound for building wire No. 4 and larger. All cable lubricants shall be UL .., listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be pp non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. t_ E. Existing Conduit: Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new conductors. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE (600 VOLTS AND UNDER): A. General: Install conductors as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings. Such Ljoints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be spliced the tap circuit. C. Branch Circuits: Not more than one power or lighting circuit shall be installed in a single conduit, except that one 3-wire circuit or one 4-wire circuit consisting of 2 different phase wires and a common neutral or 3 different phase wires and a common neutral may be installed in a single conduit. This provision shall not prohibit the installation in a single conduit of all conductors of a circuit with three- and four-way switching. D. Dedicated Neutrals: where indicated on the drawings, branch circuits shall be installed with dedicated neutrals in a single conduit. E. wiring at Outlets and Switches: Install with at least 12 inches of slack conductor at each outlet and wall switch. F. Terminations: Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque -tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A. G. Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps as permitted by the National Electrical Code. H. Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. I. Home runs on 120 volt, 20 ampere Lighting Branch Circuits: Where �^ length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet f l use No. 10 conductors; otherwise use No. 12 conductors. J. Emergency Lighting and Power Conductors: Run in conduits separate from r i all other wiring. K. Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. After a joint or splice is complete, insulate it with rubber tape, and friction tape to make the insulation of the i joint or splice equal to that of the conductor. In lieu of this, vinyl plastic tape may be used if applied in at least four layers (half lapped in two directions), with all larger splices, terminals, sharp corners and voids being first protected by application of insulating putty. L. Wet Locations: Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with the conductor manufacturer's recommendations. F 16120 - 3 M. Identifying Labels: Adhesive vinyl cloth or vinyl self -laminating adhesive labels; stamped to clearly identify each circuit. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. Securely fasten labels to all cables, -- feeders and power circuits in pull boxes, outlet boxes, wireways, lighting, power and distribution panelboards, etc. N. Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets _. and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps made for the purpose. Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. O. Cable Supports and Boxes: Install cable.supports and boxes for all vertical conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code requirements. Boxes shall be of heavy galvanized steel plate construction, not less than No. 10 USS gauge, riveted to an angle iron frame. Removable box covers shall be secured with corrosion -resistant screws. For cables without a metallic sheath, cable supports shall be of the split wedge type which clamps each conductor firmly and tightens due to the weight of cable. For cables with metallic sheath, a basket weave or equal type of support shall be provided'as approved by the cable manufacturer. END OF SECTION 16120 16120 - 4 I 7 SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including e„ General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. ► B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated, complete with lamps, coverplates, etc. All shall Cbe properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 6 , PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: The catalog numbers listed herein are generally of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices of Arrow -Hart, General Electric, Leviton, Pass and Seymour are also acceptable. B. Specification Grade: All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL listed. 2.2 COLORS: A. Ivory/Brown: All devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in ` walls finished in dark colors. r+ B. Emergency Systems: All wiring devices which are connected to the emergency power system shall have a red color. Otherwise, devices 11 shall have a color as specified above. I 16140 - 1 2.3 WALL SWITCHES (20 Ampere): A. 20 Ampere Wall Switches: For all loads: 1. Single pole wall switch: Hubbell HBL1221. 2. Three-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1223. — 3. Four-way wall switch: Hubbell HBL1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch: Hubbell HBL1221-PLC. S. Momentary Contact switch: Hubbell HBL1557. 6. Key -operated wall switch: Hubbell HBL1221L. — 2.4 RECEPTACLES: A. 20 Ampere Receptacles: 1. Simplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding simplex: Hubbell No. 5361 (NEMA 5-20R). 2. Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex: _ Hubbell No. 5362 (NEMA 5-20R). 3. Isolated Ground Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding, isolated ground duplex:. Hubbell No. IG-5362 (NEMA 5-20R) . 4. Ground Fault Current Interrupter: 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex with self-contained ground fault circuit interrupter: Hubbell No. GF-5362 (NEMA,5-20R). 5. Surge Suppressor with Isolated Ground Duplex: 20 ampere, 125 — volt, 2 pole, 3 wire grounding duplex with self-contained surge suppressor and isolated ground: Hubbell No. IG-5362S (NEMA 5-20R). B. Dryer Receptacle: 30 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding: Hubbell No. 9430A (NEMA 14-30R) with No. S723 plate and No. 9432C plug (NEMA 14-30P). C. Oven Receptacle: 50 ampere, 125/250 volt, 3 pole, 4 wire, grounding: — Hubbell No. 9450A (NEMA 14-50R) with No. S723 plate and No. 9452C plug (NEMA 14-50P). 2.5 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES: A. Duplex Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. 5206WO. B. GFCI Receptacles: Provide the specified device in FS box with a gasketed cast aluminum coverplate having a self closing gasketed lift cover. Hubbell No. WPFS26: 2.6 INCANDESCENT WALL DIMMER SWITCH: A. Incandescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular full wave solid state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, and audible and electromagnetic noise filters. Lutron Nova-T Series NT architectural switch of sizes noted on drawings. Where multiple dimmers are installed in a multi -gang box, follow the manufacturer's recommendations for derating the dimmers. B. Magnetic Low -voltage Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular full wave solid state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, and audible and electromagnetic noise filters. Lutron Nova-T Series NTLV architectural -- switch of sizes noted on drawings. , Where multiple dimmers are installed in a multi -gang box, follow the manufacturer's recommendations for derating the dimmers. 16140 - 2 r t 4 C. Electronic Low -voltage wall Dimmer Switch: Modular full wave solid state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, and audible and electromagnetic noise filters. Lutron Nova-T Series NTELV architectural switch of sizes noted on drawings. where multiple dimmers are installed in a multi -gang box, follow the manufacturer's recommendations for derating the dimmers. 2.7 FLUORESCENT WALL DIMMER SWITCH: A. Fluorescent Wall Dimmer Switch: Modular dimmer switches compatible with dimmer ballasts. Provide with trim potentiometer to adjust low - end dimming. Dimmer -ballast combination shall be capable of consistent dimming to a maximum of 10 percent of full brightness. Lutron Nova-T Series NTF with Lutron Hi -lime dimming ballasts. 2.8 COMMUNICATION DEVICES: A. Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Coverplates will be furnished by the Telephone Company. Where an outlet is shown, and it does not receive a telephone instrument, install a blank coverplate. B. Data Cable Outlet: Shall consist of an outlet box as specified under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS with adaptor. Install coverplate with 19/321, hole with bushing. 2.9 INDOOR SERVICE POLES: A. Steel Service Poles: Galvanized steel pole with baked enamel finish in color as selected by Architect. Pole length shall be 1014" with high voltage and low voltage compartments. The power compartment shall be furnished with four prewired grounding type receptacles rated 15 amperes, 125 volt. Wiremold No. 30TP-3. B. Aluminum Service Poles: Brushed anodized aluminum pole with wood grain finish on two sides. Pole length shall be 10'5" with high -voltage and low -voltage compartments and adjustable chrome -plated pedestal. Power compartment shall be furnished with four prewired grounding type receptacles rated 15 amperes, 125 volt. Wiremold No. ALTP-2. 2.10 FLOOR MOUNTED DEVICES: A. Floor Boxes: Fully adjustable cast iron box, number of gangs as shown on the drawings with all required accessories and with the fittings specified herein. Hubbell No. B-2436, B-4233, B-4333 or Walker 880CS1, 880CS2, 880CS3. B. Power Service Fitting for Duplex Receptacle: Cast aluminum fitting with satin finish and with 15 or 20 ampere, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire, grounding duplex receptacle as specified above. Hubbell No. S-3825 or Walker 828R. C. Telephone Service Fitting: Cast aluminum fitting with 2-1/8 inch and 3/4 inch combination threaded cap. Hubbell No. S-2625 or Walker 829CK-1. D. Data Cable Service Fitting: Cast aluminum fitting with 2-1/8 inch and 3/4 inch combination threaded cap. Hubbell No. S-2625 or Walker 829CK-1. E. Carpet Plate: In carpeted areas, provide bronze carpet plate as �.+ required. Hubbell No. SB-3083, SB-3084, SB-3085 or Walker 817C, 827C, t 837C. j� 16140 - 3 2.11 FIRE -RATED POKE THROUGH DEVICES: A. Description:- Factory fabricated and prewired assembly of below floor junction box unit with multichanneled, through floor raceway/firestop unit and flush service outlet assembly. B. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3 inch cored holes in the floor and matched to the floor thickness. C. Fire Rating: Unit shall be listed and labeled to match the fire rating of the floor. -^ D. Flush Power/Communication Fitting: One 20A duplex receptacle and telephone/data outlet, verify color with the Architect. Hubbell PT7F or approved equivalent. E. Furniture Feed Fitting: Furniture feed unit to accept a 3/4 inch flexible metal conduit connector, verify color with the Architect. Hubbell PT7FF or approved equivalent F. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3 inch cored openings and reestablish the fire rating of the floor. Shall be readily removable and reusable. 2.12 COVERPLATES: A. General: Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, telephone, signal outlets and other kindred devices. B. Plastic For Flush Mounted Devices: All coverplates shall be plastic plates to match devices which they cover. Sierra Electric Corporation "P-Line" or approved equivalent. C. Stainless Steel For Flush Mounted Devices: Coverplates in finished spaces shall be 0.040" stamped satin stainless steel. Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line,, or approved equivalent. In unfinished or machinery spaces plates shall be smooth plastic to match devices which they cover. Sierra "P-Line" or approved equivalent. D. Surface Mounted Devices: Zinc -coated sheet metal with rounded or beveled edges, of same size as boxes, for indoor use; cast alloy plates with gaskets for outdoor use. E. Weatherproof Devices: Die cast aluminum with spring loaded gasketed covers to close automatically when plugs are removed. Stainless steel springs. UL listed for use in damp locations and wet locations, cover closed. Orient device to maintain watertightness. Sierra 4500 series or approved equivalent. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Outlet Boxes: Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural elevations. Coordinate mounting heights with the Architectural baseboard height. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. B. Floor Boxes: Verify floor box locations and that floor boxes are adjusted properly. C. Circuit Wiring: Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 16140 4 r 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Outlet Boxes: Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices plumb and level. B. Switches: Install switches with OFF position down. C. Wall Dimmers: Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. D. Receptacles: Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. E. Coverplates: Install wall plates when painting is complete. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. F. Adjacent Devices: Group adjacent devices under single, multigang wall plates. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Wiring Devices: Inspect each wiring device for defects. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. verify that each receptacle device is energized. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.5 ADJUSTING: A. General: Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.6 CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION: A. Inside Coverplate: At each wiring device identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected in indelible ink. B. Outside Coverplate: At each wiring device, install a label on the outside of the coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material. r 3.7 MOUNTING HEIGHTS: A. General: Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. In general, devices which are shown to be installed iii at counters or other millwork shall be installed above the counter or i 1, 16140 - 5 millwork, unless noted. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by the Architect, install devices at the following heights. 1. Wall Switch: 48". 2. Receptacle: 18". 3. Telephone and Data Outlet: left. 4. Wall Dimmer Switch: 48". 5. Fire Alarm Visual Devices: lowest point of 80" or 6" below ceiling. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF INDOOR SERVICE POLES: A. General: Verify that installation of ceiling suspension system is complete. Verify that floor covering installation is complete. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, in proper location and ready for connection to indoor service poles. Verify telephone raceway installation is completed, in proper location and ready for connection to indoor service poles. Verify data communication raceway installation is completed, in proper location and. ready for connection to indoor service poles. B. Poles: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install poles plumb. Make wiring connections to branch circuit outlets using flexible conduit. Bond equipment grounding conductor and body of pole to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Neatly cut openings in ceiling panels. Install trim plate. C. Telephone/Data Connections: Interface with installation of telephone cable and connectors. Interface with installation of data communications cable and connectors. END OF SECTION 16140 16140 - 6 r k SECTION 16180 - EQUIPMENT CONTROLS AND WIRING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data and drawings on all equipment items according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to equipment wiring and control as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Equipment: Verify locations of equipment and location of electrical connections prior to installation. Equipment locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of equipment and electrical connections. 1.7 COORDINATION: A. General: Coordinate work under provisions of the General Requirements. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. Determine connection locations and requirements. 7 16180 - 1 B. Sequence of Construction: Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation schedule for equipment. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up schedule for equipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL MATERIALS: A. General: Provide electrical equipment and materials as specified under other sections of this Specification. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. General: Verify conditions according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Connections: Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. C. Thermostats: Verify the location of all thermostats in the field. 3.2 EQUIPMENT WIRING: A. General: Connect complete for operation all items of heating, air conditioning, plumbing, kitchen, laundry and laboratory equipment, and all other electrical devices furnished by the Owner or under other Divisions of the specifications. B. Locations: Outlets of various types have been indicated at equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the exact locations _ of all items. Request of the Owner and the aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on the job. C. Disconnect Switches: Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated. 3.3 KITCHEN EQUIPMENT: A. General: Do not rough -in conduits or wiring for kitchen equipment until exact equipment locations have been laid out and approved by the Owner. After approval, provide conduit stub -ups and equipment connections at the exact locations shown on those drawings. 3.4 ELEVATOR WIRING: A. General: Provide electric feeders for elevator power as scheduled. Provide in each individual elevator feeder a fused disconnect switch where shown. Terminate each such feeder at the elevator controls as directed by the elevator manufacturer. Provide all circuits required for elevator control power. Provide circuits for elevator cab lights, terminated as directed by elevator manufacturer. 16180 2 3.5 A. 3.6 A. 3.7 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. TEMPERATURE CONTROLS: General: Completely connect for operation all items for temperature controls which require electrical connections, furnishing all wiring, conduit and labor. PACKAGED AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT: General: Connect each packaged air conditioning equipment with a fused disconnect switch mounted on the unit or on a wall adjacent to the unit. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Manufacturer's Instructions: Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. Connections: Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. Wiring: Make wiring connections using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered in heat producing equipment. Receptacles: Provide receptacle outlet where connection with attachment plug is required by the manufacturer. Provide cord and cap where field -supplied attachment plug is indicated. Strain Relief: Provide suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. Devices: Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices as indicated or as required. Interconnections: Provide interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment where indicated or required. END OF SECTION 16180 16180 - 3 i SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide manufacturer's catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include furnishing and installing identification of electrical materials, equipment and installations. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratoties, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C PART 2 - PRODUCTS t , ' 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS: A. Nameplates: Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/4" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item or equipment served utilizing the equipment names shown on the drawings. B. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles. 2.2 WIRE MARKERS: A. Description: Adhesive vinyl cloth or self laminating vinyl adhesive labels. Thomas & Betts Type WBC, WES or approved equivalent. Pre- printed, type -written or field printed is acceptable. Handwritten labels are not acceptable. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, switchboard gutters, pull boxes and wireways. 1 C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as actually installed. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on shop drawings. F16195 - 1 2.3 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE: A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, foil backed detectable type, -- colored yellow with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION: A. Cleaning: Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION: A. Equipment: Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using adhesive. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. B. Underground Conduit: Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 12 inches below finished grade. 3.3 EQUIPMENT: A. General: All electrical equipment shall be identified by name utilizing engraved nameplates. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Switchboards. 2. Panelboards. 3. Motor control centers. 4. Dry type transformers. S. Main switches. 3.4 CONTROL DEVICES: A. General: All electrical control devices shall be labeled to indicate the device served. All electrical control devices shall be labeled regardless of proximity to the equipment served. Electrical control devices to be labeled shall include but not limited to the following: 1 Contactors. 2. Motor Starters. 3. Relays. 4. Disconnect Switches. 5. Timeswitches. END OF SECTION 16195 16195 - 2 F SECTION 16441 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide switch ratings, enclosure type and dimensions. C. Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to.requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. B. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of disconnect switches on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Disconnect switches: Verify locations of disconnect switches prior to installation. Disconnect switches are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. F 16441 - 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Description: NEMA KS1, Type HD heavy duty, enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position. Switches shall be unfused unless noted otherwise; quick make, quick break. All motor circuit switches shall be horsepower rated. B. Enclosures: Provide disconnect switches in NEMA 3R enclosures if exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures unless special enclosures are required. C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class RK1 fuses. D. Auxiliary Poles: Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary control circuits in starters. E. Manufacturers: Switches shall be of General Electric, Westinghouse or Square D manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make, quick break switches. 2.2 TUMBLER SWITCHES: A. Description: where space does not permit use of the above specified switches, such as within weatherproof fan housings„ etc., use suitable horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General Electric Type RB or approved equivalent. 2.3 6 POLE DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A. Description: Where disconnect switches serve two -speed, part -winding, wye-delta or other motors requiring 6 conductors, 6 pole disconnect switches shall be installed. PART 3 - EXECUTION - 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Installation: Install disconnect switches level and plumb. B. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and NECA "Standard of Installation." C. Connections: Connect disconnect switches to wiring system and to ground as indicated and as instructed by the manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL Standard 486A. D. Fuses: Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. END OF SECTION 16441 16441 - 2 r FSECTION 16450 - GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data for grounding electrodes and connections. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, ,examination, preparation and installation of exothermic connectors. D. Field Test Reports: Submit for review Contractor's Field Tests of installation. Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: Furnish and install the various grounding systems outlined herein in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. General: Submit under provisions of the General Requirements. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ROD ELECTRODE: A. Ground Rods: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet long copper clad steel ground rod. B. Manufacturers: Ground rods shall be as manufactured by Blackburn or approved equivalent. 2.2 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS: A. Pipe Clamps: Cast Bronze, heavy-duty, sized to match water pipe, as manufactured by Blackburn Series J or approved equivalent. F 16450 - 1 B. Structural Steel Connectors: Copper clad steel, 3/41, diameter by 5" minimum grounding lug, as manufactured by Burndy Type GSTUD-Hy or approved equivalent. Weld lug to structural member. C. Rod Clamps: Cast of high strength corrosion resistant copper alloy, UL listed for direct burial, as manufactured by Blackburn Number JAB 34H or approved equivalent. 2.3 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS: A. Exothermic Connections: Molds, welding metal, tools, and all accessories shall be from the same manufacturer. All connections shall be made as directed by the manufacturer's instructions. Molds shall not be altered in the field. Exothermic connections shall be made by the CADWELD or approved equivalent process. -_ 2.4 CONDUCTORS: A. Material: Stranded copper as specified in Section 16120 - CONDUCTORS. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 (NEC) requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING: A. General: Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and subject to the following additional requirements. Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point within the metallic enclosure containing the main service disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the service ground and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined service and equipment grounding electrode conductor without joint or splice to the grounding electrode system as described below. C. Grounding Electrode System: The following items shall be bonded together by the grounding electrode conductor to form the grounding electrode system. .� 1. Metal Underground Water Pipe: Connect to the main water service pipe with an approved bolted pressure clamp. Clean all contact surfaces thoroughly before connection, to assure good metal to metal contact. Where a dielectric fitting occurs on water main, _ connect the grounding conductor to the street side of the fitting. Bond the metallic conduit to the grounding conductor at each end. Provide and install with ground clamps a No. 3/0 copper jumper conductor around the water meter. "- 2. Metal Frame of Building: Connect to the effectively grounded structural steel frame of the building with a copperclad steel grounding lug as specified welded to the steel member. Connect to the grounding electrode conductor with an approved compression connection. 3. Concrete -encased Electrode: Connect to a 1/211 minimum steel reinforcing bar located in the concrete foundation or footing in contact with earth for a minimum of twenty feet with a #4 copper conductor by means of an exothermic weld connection. Extend the conductor and connect to the grounding electrode conductor with an approved compression connection. D. Supplemental Grounding Electrode: Supplement the grounding electrode system with an additional electrode which shall be 10, long by 3/4 inch 16450 - 2 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 diameter copperclad steel ground rod. Bond the supplemental grounding electrode to the service equipment ground with #6 copper conductor. INSTALLATION OF GROUND RODS: A. General: Locate ground rods a minimum of one rod length from each other and at least one rod length away from any other grounding electrode. Interconnect ground rods with bare #6 copper conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade. Connect bare cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the steel. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade. GROUNDING BUILDING STEEL: A. General: The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the building service grounding electrode, using the conductor size specified in National Electrical Code Section 250-94(a). The grounding conductor shall be connected to building steel using a grounding lug as specified above welded to the building steel. GROUNDING RACEWAYS: A. General: Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems, pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit. Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic conduit. Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways terminating within switchboards, motor control centers, panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures. Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: A. General: Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor, with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect all grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and to ground buses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault back to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. Size all of these grounding conductors per NEC Table 250-95. CONNECTIONS: A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible. 1. Use electroplated or hot tin coated materials to assure high conductivity and make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar metals with inert material such as red paint to prevent future penetration of F 16450 - 3 moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic Weld Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections. Install at connections to ground rods. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. .C. Terminations: Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or to values specified in UL 486A and 486B. D. Compression Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide the correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor. END OF SECTION 16450 16450 - 4 r f 7 k i SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide complete catalog data and drawings on all items of equipment. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before commencing fabrication. Drawings shall indicate number, size, interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices; dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information necessary to determine compliance with the drawings and specifications. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: Provide all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. C. Main Panelboard: The building main panelboard shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for "Service Entrance Equipment." 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. General: Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of panelboards on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Deliver panelboards in factory fabricated water resistant wrapping. Protect panelboards from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Store and protect in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Handle panelboards carefully to avoid damage to material components, enclosure and finish. 16470 - 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Panelboards: Verify locations of panelboards prior to installation. Panelboards are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete electrical distribution system. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of panelboards. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS: A. Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards. Cabinets shall be rigidly constructed of sheet steel of gauges conforming to Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or welded; edges turned over to receive trim. Cabinet fronts shall be cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12 gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim clamps which will allow plumbing; same size as the cabinet box if surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all sides if flush mounted. B. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be NEMA Type 1, 3R, 4X or 12 as indicated on the Drawings or as required. C. Cabinet Doors: Provide -each door with a substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle. Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike. Provide with metal directory frame mounted inside each panel door. D. Cabinet Finish: All back boxes shall be galvanized; all exposed metal, including fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer. E. Multiple Sections: Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes bolted together and covered by a common multiple door front; each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. _ F. Branch Circuits: Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. Connect all circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing. G. Copper Panelboard Bus: Provide each panelboard with copper busbars. -- Provide each panelboard with a separate equipment copper grounding bus bar bonded to the panelboard cabinet. Where indicated on the drawings provide panelboards with an isolated copper grounding bus bar insulated from the panelboard cabinet. '- 16470 - 2 2.2 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit breakers as scheduled, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled. B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolted in circuit breakers as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. C. Manufacturers: Panels shall be of General Electric, Cutler -Hammer, Challenger or Square D manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric panels listed below. 1. Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Series A, Type AQ with type THQB, THHQB or TXQB circuit breakers as required. D. Door in door construction: Provide cabinet front with door in door. One door over interior and additional door over wiring gutters. 2.3 CIRCUIT BREAKER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. General: Panelboards shall have the number and sizes of bolted -in circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings, with main circuit breakers or lugs only on the mains as scheduled. Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings; no subfeed breakers shall be permitted. Provide circuit breakers as scheduled on the drawings. B. Manufacturers: Panelboards shall be of General Electric,_ Cutler - Hammer, Challenger or Square D manufacture, equivalent to the General Electric Type AQ, Type AE or Spectra Series Panelboards determined by the system voltage and by the sizes and types of circuit breakers scheduled on the drawings. C. Main Circuit Breaker: 1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Main circuit breakers shall be molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. D. Branch Circuit Breakers: 1. Molded Case Thermal Magnetic Trip: Branch circuit breakers shall be molded case with thermal magnetic trip as described in Section 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, NECA "Standard of Installation", and the manufacturer's written instructions. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. B. Ground Fault Protection: Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters." C. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. D. Filler Plates: Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. 16470 - 3 E. Circuit Directory: Provide a neatly typewritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Identify branch circuits with -- room numbers to match those finally posted on doors. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic. F. Circuit Labels: Provide engraved plastic nameplate to identify the circuits on each distribution panelboard. G. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates on each panelboard to identify the panelboard name, voltage and upstream power source. -- H. Hospital Distribution System: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate on each panelboard to identify the electrical system serving the panelboard (Normal System, Critical Branch, or Life Safety Branch). — I. Emergency Systems: Provide an engraved plastic nameplate on each panelboard to identify the electrical system serving the panelboard (Normal or Emergency). J. Spare Conduits: Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Minimum spare conduits: S empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE. _ K. Grounding: Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 16450. L. Fuses: Install fuses as specified in all fused switches. M. Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.2 ADJUSTING: A. Load Balancing: Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 10 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. END OF SECTION 16470 16470 - 4 F C� E SECTION 16475 - CIRCUIT DISCONNECT AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data sheets showing electrical characteristics including time -current curves. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include all operation and maintenance manuals. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements:. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: A. General: Provide maintenance materials according to the Conditions of E the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Fuse Pullers: Provide two fuse pullers. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. General: Furnish under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Spare Fuses: Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less than 3 fuses where a carton does not contain as many as }� 3) of each size of each type of fuse used. These spare fuses are in I addition to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during [ construction and testing. ,.� PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FUSES: A. General: Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the installation complete and in working order, including a complete set of fuses in each spare switch. 16475 7 1 B. Fuse Identification Label: Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses. C. Regulatory Standards: Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform to the UL classes listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied. D. Installation: Fuses shall be shipped to the job in boxes, and shall not be installed in any equipment until the installation is complete, and final tests have been made prior to energizing the equipment. E. Fuse Reducers: Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to fit the fuses. F. Class and Type: Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type designations referring to those indicated on the plans. 1. Class L Time Delay (601-6000 Amps): Class L; Bussmann Type KRP-C "Hi -Cap", current limiting with time delay, interrupting rating _ of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, current rating 601-6000 amperes. 2. Class RK-1 Time Delay (1-600 Amps): Class RK-1; Bussmann Type LPN or LPS "Low Peak". Fuses shall be available in ratings 1-600 _ amperes, shall be current limiting dual element with time delay, and shall have interrupting rating of 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses shall be equipped with slotted blades, and switch fuse clips shall be provided with matching NEC fuse rejection feature. 2.2 MOLDED CASE THERMAL MAGNETIC TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A. Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, one, two and three pole, with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, UL listed. Two and three pole circuit breakers with common trip and single operating handle. Handle ties between breakers are _ unacceptable. Circuit breakers shall have the voltage and trip rating scheduled or indicated on the Drawings. B. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make, quick -break action with positive handle indication. C. Trip Elements: Thermal magnetic trip element calibrated for 40 deg. C. ambient temperature. D. Terminations: Terminations for 10-30 ampere breakers shall be UL listed for use with 60 degree C. or 75 degree C. conductors. Terminations for breakers 35 ampere and greater shall be UL listed for use with 75 degree C conductors. E. Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings. F. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Where indicated on the drawings provide molded case circuit breakers with automatically resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating - 100,000 rms amperes symmetrical let -through current and energy level less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse. 16475 2 4 G. Breakers 250 Amp Frame and Greater: Circuit breakers with frame sizes r greater than 250 amperes shall have adjustable magnetic trip elements I which are set by a single adjustment, push to trip button and reverse f connection capability. r• H. Switching Duty: UL listed SWD for switching duty, 15 and 20 ampere f single pole, suitable for 120 volts ac fluorescent loads. I. HACR Listing: UL listed as HACR type, 120/240 volt, 15-60 ampere, one, two and three pole, to serve heating air conditioning and refrigeration equipment. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR for air conditioning equipment branch circuits. J. HID Lighting Circuits: Circuit breakers serving HID lighting circuits shall be specifically designed for HID circuits. K. Accessories: Provide circuit breakers with switching neutral, shunt trip, ground fault current interrupters, or remote controlled operators as scheduled on the drawings. L. Motor Circuit Protectors: Where indicate on the Drawings or Specified elsewhere provide molded case circuit breaker with integral instantaneous trip element in each magnetic pole. 2.3 MOLDED CASE NON -PROGRAMMABLE SOLID STATE TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKER: rA. Description: NEMA AB 1, molded case, with integral solid state current L sensing and trip system, UL listed. Circuit breakers shall have the voltage and trip rating scheduled or indicated on the Drawings. B. Operation: Operating mechanism shall be over center, trip free, toggle mechanism with quick -make, quick -break common trip, action with positive handle indication and reverse connection capability. r` C. Solid State Trip: Circuit breakers shall be equipped with a digital t solid state current sensing and trip system. The circuit breaker ampere rating shall be established by a UL listed rating plug. The digital trip system shall accurately sense the RMS value of sinusoidal and non -sinusoidal current waveforms by continuously sampling each phase throughout every cycle. A push to trip button shall be provided on the cover. D. Terminations: Terminations shall be UL listed for use with 75 Deg. C. conductors. E. 100sk Continuous Current Rating: Provide circuit breakers with UL listing for 100sk continuous current rating. F. Accessories: Provide accessories as scheduled on the drawings. G. Interrupting Rating: Circuit breakers shall have minimum RMS symmetrical ampere interrupting ratings as scheduled on drawings. H. Short-time/Instantaneous Adjustment: Provide each circuit breaker with a single field adjustable instantaneous pickup knob to set the instantaneous response for all poles. The short -time pickup with I-squared-t slope delay shall track the instantaneous setting at approximately 50 to 80 percent of the instantaneous pickup. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Fuses: Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F16475 - 3 B. Fuse Labels: Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read. END OF SECTION 16475 16475 - 4 F1111. FSECTION 16495 - TRANSFER SWITCH AND CONTROLS k PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: �^ I A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including l General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, switch size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, operating logic, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, i protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. D. Operation Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's operation data. Include instructions for operating equipment. Include instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions when engine generator is running. E. Maintenance Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's maintenance data. Include routine preventative maintenance and lubrication schedule. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts. 1.3 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment, and service necessary for and incidental to the complete electrical distribution system. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. General: Transport, handle, store, and protect products according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Delivery: Deliver wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping �+ skids. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their d required time period. 16495 - 1 L ti C. Storage: Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Automatic Transfer Switch: Verify locations of automatic — transfer switch prior to installation. Locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete wiring system. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of automatic transfer switches. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE: A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of transfer switch for one year from Date of Substantial.Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: A. General: Provide maintenance materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Tools: For each automatic transfer switch provide two of each special tool required for maintenance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH: A. Description: Transfer switch shall be a double throw switch operated by momentarily energized single solenoid mechanism and a control module interconnected to provide complete automatic operation. It shall be inherently interlocked mechanically and electrically, with no neutral _ position possible. Operating current for transfer shall be from source to which it is transferring load. The contact transition time in either direction shall not exceed one -sixth of a second. Switch shall be suitable for use as service equipment where required. B. Contacts: Main contacts shall be silvered. All contacts and coils shall be easily replaceable from front of panel without major disassembly. Interlocked molded case circuit breakers or contactors is not acceptable. C. Manual Operator: Provide a manual operating handle for maintenance and emergency purposes. 16495 - 2 F 7 r 2.2 F F F D. Codes and Standards: The automatic transfer switch shall conform to the requirements of the following codes and standards and shall be listed as such when applicable: 1. UL Standard 1008 - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches. 2. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, including use in emergency and standby systems in accordance with Articles 517, 700, 701 and 702. 3. NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities. 4. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. 5. IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems. 6. IEEE Standard 241 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Systems in Commercial Buildings. 7: NEMA Standard ICS2-447 - AC Automatic Transfer Switches. 8. IEC - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches. E. Configuration: Electrically operated, mechanically held transfer switch. The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or momentary outages so that the contact pressure is maintained at a constant value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum reliability and operating life. F. Switched Neutral: Where neutral conductors are to be switched as indicated on the Drawings, the automatic transfer switch shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The overlapping neutral transfer contacts shall not overlap for a time duration greater than 100 milliseconds. G. Control Module: The automatic transfer switch sensing and logic shall be controlled by an integral microprocessor. The control module shall be supplied with a protective cover and shall be separately mounted inside the transfer switch for ease of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be solid state on normal and alternate and mounted on plug-in circuit boards. Interfacing relays shall be industrial control grade plug-in type with dust covers. The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand capability in accordance with IEEE Standard 472, ANSI C37.90a. H. Manufacturers: The automatic transfer switch shall be Asco 940 or approved equivalent. TRANSFER SWITCH OPTIONS AND FEATURES: A. Indicating Lights: The switch shall contain pilot lights to indicate the source to which the switch is connected. Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, SWITCH POSITION. B. Test Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to simulate failure of normal source. C. Engine Start Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to start the engine manually for test purposes without transferring the load. D. Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer from alternate to normal source. E. Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: 1 normally open and 1 normally closed. F. Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage. The pickup voltage shall be field adjustable from 85% to 100% of nominal and the dropout voltage shall be field adjustable from 75% to 98% of the pickup value. Initiate transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent of nominal source voltage. 7 16495 - 3 G. Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor each line of alternate source voltage and frequency. The pickup voltage shall be field adjustable from 85% to 100W of nominal (factory set at 90%) and pickup frequency shall be field adjustable from 90% to 100% of nominal (factory set at 95%). H. In -Phase Monitor: Inhibit transfer until source and load are within 15 electrical degrees. I. Engine Exerciser: A field adjustable clock exerciser shall be provided, to exercise the plant automatically at full load at regular intervals for a pre -selected period of time. Start engine every 7 days; run for 30 minutes under load and 30 minutes unloaded before shutting down. J. Remote Control Terminals: Provide terminals for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to transfer to alternate source and terminals for remote contacts which open to inhibit transfer to alternate source and/or retransfer to normal. K. Output Terminals: Provide output terminals to signal the actual availability of the normal and alternate sources, as determined by the voltage sensing pickup and dropout settings for each source. 2.3 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: A. Starting Controls: Engine starting control shall operate from a DPDT gold -flashed contact rated 10 amps, 32 VDC that closes for engine start and opens for engine stop. When engine fires, cranking controls shall be automatically disconnected. Cranking disconnect shall prevent recranking for definite time if voltage falls to a low value. If engine fails to fire, or if any safety device operates while the engine is running, engine shall stop immediately and starting controls shall lock out, requiring manual reset. Cranking shall be continuous for 45 seconds before lockout. B. Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by normal source monitor. C. Time Delay To Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: The time delay to override momentary normal source outages shall be field adjustable from 0.5 to 6 seconds and factory set at one second. Transfer switch shall close pilot contact to start engine 1 second after normal source failure or 1 second after drop in voltage on any phase to 85% or less of normal voltage. D. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor and permission by alternate source monitor. When generator is delivering not less than 90% rated voltage and 95t of nominal frequency, the main transfer switch shall transfer load from normal to alternate source. E. Time Delay Before Transfer to Alternate Power Source: The time delay on transfer to alternate source shall be field adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes and factory set at 0 minutes. F. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon restoration of normal source to not less than 95% of rated voltage on all phases. G. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Power: The time delay on retransfer to normal shall be field adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 30 minutes. If standby plant should fail while carrying the load, retransfer to normal source shall be instantaneous upon restoration of normal source. — 16495 - 4 F H. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: The unloaded running time delay for generator cooldown shall be field adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes and factory set at 5 minutes. The system shall then be ready to restart on next power failure. I. Engine Exerciser: Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during exercising period. J. Alternate System Exerciser: Transfer load to alternate source during engine exercising period. 2.4 TRANSFER SWITCH RATINGS: A. Voltage: Voltage ratings as indicated on the Drawings. B. Switched Poles: 3 or 4 poles as indicated on the Drawings. C. Load Inrush Rating: Rated for all classes of load. D. Continuous Current Rating: Continuous current rating as indicated on the Drawings. E. Withstand Current Rating: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes, when used with Class RK1 current limiting fuse. Withstand current rating at 480 volts shall be as follows when used with coordinated molded case circuit breaker. 1. 70 and 100 ampere switch: 14,000 rms symmetrical amperes: 2. 150 ampere switch: 22,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 3. 225 and 260 ampere switch: 30,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 4. 300 to 400 ampere switch: 42,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 5. 600 to 1000 ampere switch: 65,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 6. 1200 ampere switch: 85,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 7. 1600 to 4000 ampere switch: 100,000 rms symmetrical amperes. 2.5 SERVICE CONDITIONS: A. Service Conditions: NEMA ICS 1. B. Temperature: 40 degrees C. C. Altitude: 3,300 feet. 2.6 ENCLOSURE: A. Enclosure: ICS 6, Type 1 or as indicated on the Drawings. B. Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. General: Verify conditions under the provisions of the General Requirements. B. Surface: Verify that surface is suitable for transfer switch installation. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. General: Provide 6" concrete housekeeping pads. F rM 16495 - 5 i f. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install transfer switches in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Nameplates: Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION. C. Connections: Tighten factory made connections, including connectors, terminals, bus joints, mountings, and grounding. Tighten field connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values or as specified in UL Standards 486A and 486B. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. General: Prepare and start systems under provisions of the General Requirements. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION: A. General: Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the General Requirements. B. Description: Demonstrate operation of transfer switch in bypass, normal, and emergency modes. END OF SECTION 16495 16495 - 6 r FSECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Include manufacturer's catalog data and drawings on all interior and exterior lighting fixtures with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled by Luminaire "Type" in alphabetical order, with the proposed fixture and accessories clearly labeled. Ballast and lamp data shall accompany fixture submittals. Submit dimensioned drawings and performance data including coefficients of utilization, candela distribution, spacing to mounting height ratio, efficiency and visual comfort probability. Furnish scale drawings, catalog data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data required by the Architect/Engineer for every type fixture. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include: instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. General: Where a lighting fixture has been scheduled on the drawings by manufacturer's name and catalog number, it has been done in order to establish a standard. Any substitution to the scheduled lighting fixture shall be of equal or better quality. No substitution shall be made without the review of the engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality. It is the contractor's responsibility to submit sufficient data for review by the Engineer. If requested by the engineer, the contractor shall provide samples of each proposed substitution for review. Should a substitution be unacceptable to the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the originally specified lighting fixture. 1.4 PRE -APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS: A. General: All requests for substitute lighting fixtures shall be submitted to the Engineer no fewer than ten calendar days prior to the bid opening. The substitution proposal shall be bound, manufacturer's catalog data in alphabetical order by Fixture Type, and a cross index clearly indicating all proposed substitutions. Engineer's review is only to establish the suitability of the manufacturer and the fixture series. If approved by the Engineer, the substitution shall be listed in an addendum. The substituted fixtures are still subject to Engineer's review as described elsewhere in this section. r r. 7, 16500 - 1 1.5 CATALOG NUMBERS: A. General: All features specified or scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called for. 1.6 SCOPE: A. Description: The work shall include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. ._ B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. General: Deliver, store, protect; and handle products according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Accept delivery of lighting fixtures on site and inspect for damage. Report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. Protect lighting fixtures from degradation by storing above grade protected from the weather. Provide appropriate covering. Lighting _ fixtures shall remain in factory protective shipping cartons until installation. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Locations: The drawings are schematic and only indicate the approximate location of lighting fixtures. The precise location of lighting fixtures shall be coordinated with the architectural reflected ceiling plan and other architectural features. B. Recessed Lighting Fixtures: Verify that there will be sufficient headroom for..the installation of recessed lighting fixtures prior to ordering lighting fixtures. Verify ceiling system type and provide suitable plaster ring or frame if required. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. General: Provide extra materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Deliver extra materials in factory packing. B. Lamps (One Standard Carton): At the completion and acceptance of the work provide and deliver to the owner 1 standard carton, or a minimum of 12 replacement lamps of each lamp type. The lamps shall be delivered in unopened boxes to the location designated by the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. General: Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any -, designations be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. 16500 - 2 r +- 2.2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES: A. General: All exterior mounted lighting fixtures shall be UL listed for wet locations where installed �n direct contact with weather and UL listed for damp locations where installed protected from weather. 2.3 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: A. General: Electronic ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of P" operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum power factor of 95t and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be 10t maximum. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or minus 25t. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment. B. Ballasts for TS Rapid Start Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum ANSI input watts when used with F32T8 "Octron" lamps. Ballasts shall be Advance Mark V IC, Motorola Rapid Start or approved equivalent. 1. One Lamp: 31 watts. 2. Two Lamp: 61 watts. 3. Three Lamp: 95 watts. 4. Four Lamp: 121 watts. C. Biaxial Fluorescent Lamps: Ballasts shall have the following maximum ANSI input watts when used with F39BX biaxial lamps. Ballasts shall be Advance Mark V IC, Motorola Rapid Start or approved equivalent. r 1. One Lamp: 37 watts. ll 2. Two Lamp: 72 watts. 3. Three Lamp: 106 watts. i� 2.4 ELECTRONIC FLUORESCENT DIMMING BALLASTS AND CONTROLS: A. Description: Electronic dimming ballasts shall be constructed of discrete or integrated electronic components and shall have a minimum frequency of operation of 20 kHz and shall operate without visible flicker. Ballast shall be UL listed Class P, CSA certified and sound rated "A". Ballast shall have a minimum power factor of 95V and an maximum lamp current crest factor of 1.6. Input current total harmonic distortion shall be 10t maximum. Ballasts shall maintain constant light output with input voltage variations of plus or minus 25t. Ballast shall have a sequenced start progression which first heats cathode filaments and then ignites the lamp. Ballasts shall withstand line transients as defined in ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Category A and shall comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Part 18, for non -consumer equipment. Ballasts shall dim continuously between loot and 20% light output. B. Controls: Provide wall mounted control units designed to be used in conjunction with the electronic dimming ballast. C. Manufacturers: Electronic fluorescent dimming ballasts shall be Lutron Eco-10, Presclite Intellect or approved equivalent. r� 16500 - 3 I t 2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMP EMERGENCY POWER SUPPLY: A. Rapid Start Lamps: Emergency fluorescent power supplies shall consist of a high -temperature, maintenance -free nickel cadmium battery, a charger, and electronic circuitry in one case. Provide a solid-state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery, and a — double pole test switch. The emergency ballast shall be capable of operating one 40 watt T8 or T12 lamp a minimum of 90 minutes producing a minimum of 1100 lumens. The unit shall consume 4 watts of input power and have 24 watt-hour battery capacity. The unit shall be UL listed for installation either inside or on top of the fixture, warranted for five years from date of purchase. 2.6 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) BALLASTS: A. Description: All interior HID lighting fixture ballasts shall be encased and potted and shall have automatic thermal protection. Outdoor HID ballasts shall be coil and core type. HID ballasts shall be high power factor, minimum 90%. Ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.4. B. Metal Halide: Peak -lead autotransformer, high power factor for all wattages. C. High Pressure Sodium: High -leakage reactor, high power factor for 70, 100 and 150 watts. Auto -regulated lead, high power factor for 200 and greater watts. D. Mercury Vapor: Constant wattage autotransformer, high power factor for all wattages. 2.7 ACRYLIC LENSES: A. Standard thickness: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic. B. 0.125 Inch Lenses: Wherever acrylic lenses are specified or noted, the material used shall be virgin acrylic with a minimum nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. Only KSH brand lenses shall be acceptable. 2.8 PROTECTIVE SHIELDS FOR BARE LAMPS: A. Protective Shields: Where open tube lamps are installed in food preparation areas, provide approved plastic shields over the tubes. 2.9 INCANDESCENT LAMPS: A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion -and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; General Electric, Phillips, Sylvania or approved equivalent. B. Incandescent A Lamps: Medium base, inside frosted unless scheduled or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V, 750 hour minimum. C. Incandescent R Lamps: Medium base, reflector flood or spot as scheduled or recommended otherwise by the fixture manufacturer. Lamps shall be 120V, 2000 hour minimum. 16500 - 4 7 2.10 FLUORESCENT LAMPS: A. General: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the best grade, and of the ratings and types scheduled on the drawings or as required by the lighting fixture manufacture; Philips, General Electric, Sylvania or pre -approved equivalent. B. T-8 3500K: Rapid start, T-B, 3500K, 32 watt, 2850 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 20000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips F32T8/TL835. C. 32 Watt Compact Fluorescent: Rapid start, 3500K, 26 watts, 2400 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 10000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips PL-T32W/35/4P. D. 40 Watt Biaxial Fluorescent: Rapid start, 3500K, 40 watts, 3150 initial lumens, 82 CRI, 10000 hour minimum with 3 hours per start equal to Philips PL-L40W/35/RS. 2.11 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) LAMPS: A. Metal Halide: Phosphor coated "E" or 11BT" lamp. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Locate recessed ceiling luminaries as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. Fixtures shall be securely fastened to the ceiling framing member by the use of four UL listed clips. Support luminaries larger than 2 x 4 foot size independent of ceiling grid. Install recessed luminaries to permit removal from below. C. Fixtures in Plaster or Gypboard Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster or gypboard ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Install surface mounted luminaries plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. For lay -in ceilings install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. Do not suspend fixtures from lay -in ceiling panels. E. Continuous Rows: Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. F. Pendant Mounted Fixtures: Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. G. Fixtures Mounted to Exposed Grid: Where fixtures are mounted to an 4 exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid ll provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure, 7 16500 - 5 t: otherwise use bolts or screws to secure fixture to ceiling grid. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. H. Wall Mounted Fixtures: Install wall mounted luminaries, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled. Coordinate the locations with architectural wall elevations and with architectural features. I. Exit Signs: Install surface mounted exit .signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. J. Accessories: Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. K. Connections: Connect luminaries to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Lamps: Install specified lamps in each luminaire. M. Firestopping: Install recessed luminaries using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. 3.2 REUSED FIXTURES: A. General: Where existing lighting fixtures are to be relocated, carefully remove and store the fixture. When it is ready to be hung, thoroughly wash all dirt and dust from the fixture and lens, hang the fixture and install new lamps. Should any such fixtures be damaged in this process replace them with matching new ones at no cost to the owner. 3.3FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. General: Operate'each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.4 ADJUSTING: A. General: Aim and adjust luminaries as indicated or as directed. B. Exit Signs: Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.5 CLEANING: A. General: Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK: A. General: Relamp luminaries that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16500 16500 - 6 FSECTION 16620 - STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. C E 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide data showing dimensions, weights, r ratings, interconnection points, and internal wiring diagrams for r G engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack, battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, day tank, and remote radiator. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review complete Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. Indicate electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Show plan and elevation views with overall and r interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and combustion air requirements, electrical diagrams including schematic and interconnection diagrams. D. Test Reports: Submit for review Manufacturer's test data. Indicate results of performance testing. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete r' manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include ` instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit for review Manufacturer's Certification. Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. Include copy of manufacturer's certified drawings in project record documents. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit under according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Indicate procedures and findings. H. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Include instructions for normal operation. Include instructions for routine maintenance requirements, service manuals for engine and day tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and emergency maintenance procedures. Provide three bound copies of commercial type manuals consisting of operating and maintenance information, parts, books, dimensional drawings and wiring diagrams of engine generator set and all auxiliary equipment. 1.3 SCOPE: A. General: Furnish and install a complete emergency engine generator plant to furnish power to circuits as shown. All equipment shall be new and unused. The unit shall be the product of a manufacturer r, regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. That company and its authorized dealer shall assume sole responsibility for the [ performance of the unit and all its accessories. The unit shall be a C16620 - 1 standard model in regular production and shall be selected to operate at a rating recommended by the manufacturer's current catalog literature. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code) and all applicable State and Local Electrical Ordinances. B. UL Listing: Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. General: Transport, handle, store, and protect products according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections and in conformance with manufacturer's recommended practices as outlined in applicable Installation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Delivery: Accept delivery of unit on site wrapped for protection and mounted on shipping skids. Inspect and report concealed damage to carrier within their required time period. C. Storage: Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. D. Handling: Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as shown on the Drawings. B. Location of Standby Generator: Verify location of standby generator _ prior to installation. Locations are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensions are indicated. Locate as required to complete electrical distribution system. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of all equipment. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE: A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of engine generator for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS: A. General: Provide maintenance materials according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Tools: Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator system. Package tools in adequately sized metal tool box. 16620 - 2 I r F EXTRA MATERIALS: General: Furnish according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Filters: Provide two of each fuel, oil and air filter element under provisions of the General Requirements. WARRANTY: A. General: The generating unit offered shall be covered by the manufacturer's standard warranty or guarantee on new machines, which shall apply for a minimum of two years following certificate of final payment. 1.12 PARTS AND SERVICE: A. General: The supplier offering the engine generator set shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer of the set, and shall be fully qualified and authorized to provide service and parts for the engine, generator and auxiliary components at any time, day or night. Availability of parts and service will be considered in reviewing the submittal. 1.13 TESTING: A. General: The complete engine generator plant shall be assembled and tested at the factory. The tests shall be as outlined herein and a certified report of the test shall be submitted for review. A copy of the report shall be bound in the operation and maintenance manual. Factory tests shall be as follows: 1. The unit shall be run at 100% load for two hours. At fifteen minute intervals readings shall be taken and logged for generator terminal voltage, generator output current, frequency, engine oil pressure, engine water temperature and average air temperature. 2. The transient response shall be measured and logged at 100%, 90%, 50%, and 25% load by single stage switching. 3. Engine overspeed trip, water temperature trip and oil pressure trip shall be tested and logged. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. General: The standby engine generator shall be of Caterpillar or Onan manufacture. 2.2 STANDBY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM: A. Description: NFPA 110, engine generator system to provide source of power for Level 1 applications, and conforming to NFPA 99. B. Sources: Engine, generator and accessories shall be compatible equipment, furnished by a single manufacturer and shall be packaged and warranted as a unit. C. System Capacity: Provide KW rating as indicated on the Drawings at 0.8 power factor, at elevation of 3200 feet above sea level in an ambient temperature of 100 degrees F. maximum and 0 degrees F. minimum, standby rating using engine mounted radiator. The rating of the unit shall be based on operation of the set when equipped with all of the necessary �+ 16620 - 3 operating accessories, such as radiator, fan, air cleaners, lubricating oil pump, fuel injector pump, fuel transfer pump, jacket water pump, governor, charging generator, main generator, exciter, regulator, muffler and other devices specified herein. 2.3 ENGINE: A. Type: Water cooled inline or V type, -four stroke cycle, compression ignition Diesel internal combustion engine, either naturally aspirated, pressure charged or turbocharged. B. Rating: Sufficient to operate under 10 percent overload for one hour in an ambient of 100 degrees F. at elevation of 3200 feet. C. Horsepower: The brake horsepower of the engine at rated RPM with all accessories attached, shall not be less than required by the full load rating of the generator, taking into account all efficiency losses. D. Fuel System: No. 2 fuel oil. State guaranteed fuel consumption at 100, 75, and 50 percent load at rated speed. Fuel consumption shall not exceed 0.44 pounds per bake horsepower per hour at full load with fuel rated at 19,350 Btu per pound (high heat value). E. Engine speed: 1800 RPM. F. Cylinders: Multicylinders, vertical inline or V type; removable wet or dry type liners of close grained alloy iron, heat treated for proper hardness"to obtain maximum life. G. Pistons: Trunk type; oil cooled; cast iron or aluminum alloy; fitted with both compression and oil control rings. H. Crankshaft: Drop forged, electrically hardened and dynamically balanced; main bearing journal on both sides of each crankpin. I. Bearings: Connecting rod and main bearings shall be precision removable shell type. J. Valves: Heat resisting alloy steel with stellite facing; stellite faced exhaust valve seats. K. Flywheel: Both statically and dynamically balanced. L. Lubrication: Submerged suction, gear type oil pump to supply forced feed, constant pressure oil to all important points such as main bearings, crank pin bearings, pistons, piston plus, timing gears, camshaft bearings, and valve rocker mechanisms; replaceable element, full flow oil filter; spring loaded bypass valve to bypass oil if filter is clogged; lubricating oil cooler, engine mounted and water cooled. State guaranteed lubricating oil consumption. M. Fuel Pump: Integral engine driven fuel transfer pump to supply adequate quantity of fuel under all conditions to the engine injection system. N. Governor (Electronic, Isochronous): Provide electronic governor to — provide isochronous regulation, no load to full load and 0.25 percent steady state regulation. Recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following sudden load changes. Equip governor with means for manual operation and adjustment. O. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include remote starting control circuit, with MANUAL -OFF -REMOTE selector switch on engine generator control panel. 16620 - 4 1 i P. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by r+ manufacturer. Q. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F., and suitable for operation on 120 volts AC. R. Radiator: Engine shall be equipped with mounted radiator using a permanent type ethylene glycol antifreeze coolant, with blower type fan, water manifold, temperature control valve, and gear or V belt rdriven engine water circulating pump, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient temperature of 110 degrees F. Radiator air flow restriction 0.5 inches of water maximum. S. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear driven water pump. Include fuel pressure gauge, water temperature gauge, and lube oil pressure gauge on engine/generator control panel. T. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring type vibration isolators and mount on structural steel base. U. Exhaust System: Provide critical type silencer, with muffler companion flanges and flexible stainless steel exhaust connection for each exhaust outlet, sized in accordance with engine manufacturer's instructions. [ V. Air Cleaner and Silencer: Provide an air cleaner and critical grade silencer as recommended by the engine manufacturer. r 2.4 GENERATOR: i ` A. Generator: NEMA MG1, engine drive, revolving field, reconnectible brushless synchronous generator with brushless exciter, direct connected to engine with steel disc flexible coupling. Generator housing shall bolt to engine flywheel housing. It shall have a single ball bearing support for the rotor. Rotor shall be dynamically balanced up to 25% overspeed. It shall be open, dripproof type with i" amortisseur windings. B. Rating: KW rating as indicated on the Drawings, at 0.8 power factor, voltage rating as indicated on the Drawings, 60 Hz at 1800 rpm for continuous service in standby power application at the altitude and ambient temperature specified hereinbefore. C. Insulation Class: F. D. Temperature Rise: 130 degrees C Standby. E. Enclosure: NEMA MG1, open drip proof. F. Exciter: Generator field excitation shall be by a rotating exciter mounted on generator rotor shaft through a brushless rotating diode system. G. Voltage Regulation: Include generator mounted volts per hertz exciter regulator to match engine and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation plus or minus 1 percent from no load to full load at 0.8 �•-power factor. Include manual controls to adjust voltage droop, voltage level (plus or minus 10 percent) and voltage gain. voltage stability shall be plus or minus 0.5 percent of average RMS value at any steady state load condition from no load to full load. Stable voltage r 16620 - 5 G operation shall be reestablished within 2 seconds following any sudden load change between no load and full load. On any load addition up to and including 90 percent full load, the voltage dip shall not exceed 20 percent of rated voltage. 2.5 ACCESSORIES: A. Remote Radiator: Vertical discharge remote radiator, selected and sized by engine generator manufacturer to match engine cooling capacity, and suitable for operation at elevation of 3200 feet in an ambient air temperature of 110 degrees F. Fan motor voltage as indicated on the Drawings. B. Heat Exchanger: Engine or base mounted heat exchanger and expansion tank of type and capacity recommended by engine manufacturer. Include solenoid shut off valve for installation on the cooling water inlet under Division 15, and connected to open when engine runs. C. Skid Mounted Fuel Tank (Dual Wall, 24 Hour Capacity): Provide engine generator set with a UL listed, dual wall, aluminized steel fuel tank. Fuel tank shall be incorporated in sub base of generating set. Provide tank with flexible fuel line connections, lockable fill cap, vent to both primary and secondary containments, fuel level gauge, low fuel level alarm, and leak detection alarm. Tank shall have fuel capacity to provide 24 hours of operation at full load. Tank shall have baked enamel finish and weatherproof secondary containment. D. Batteries: Heavy duty, diesel starting type lead acid storage batteries, 170 ampere hours minimum capacity. Match battery voltage to starting system. Include necessary cables and clamps. E. Battery Tray: Treated for electrolyte resistance, constructed to contain spillage. F. Battery Charger: Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. Provide charger with adjustable charge rate with two steps, trickle charge and fast charge; automatic reset thermal overload circuit breaker on charger. Include full wave rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Charger may be mounted on wall, on generator control panel in enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements, or in automatic transfer switch and shall operate from 120 volts normal power. G. Line Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, molded case circuit breaker on generator output with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, sized in accordance with NFPA 70. Include battery voltage operated shunt trip, connected to open circuit breaker on engine failure. Unit mount in enclosure to meet NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements. H. Engine Generator Control Panel: NEMA 250, Type 1 generator mounted control panel enclosure with engine and generator controls and indicators. Include provision for padlock and the following equipment and features: 1. Frequency Meter: 45-65 Hz. range, 3.5 inch dial. 2. AC Output Voltmeter: 3.5 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. 3. AC Output Ammeter: 3.5 inch dial, 2 percent accuracy, with phase selector switch. 4. Output voltage adjustment. 5. Push -to -test indicator lamps, one each for low oil pressure, high water temperature, overspeed, and overcrank. 6. Engine start/stop selector switch. 7. Engine running time meter. 8. Oil pressure gauge. 16620 - 6 r 9. Water temperature gauge. 10. Auxiliary Relay: 3PDT, operates when engine runs, with contact r* terminals prewired to terminal strip. 11. Additional visual indicators and alarms as required by NFPA 110. 12. Remote Alarm Contacts: Pre -wire SPDT contacts to terminal strip for remote alarm functions required by NFPA 110. 13. Panel lights. 14. Combination alarm and shutdown systems for high water temperature and/or low oil pressure. 15. Combination alarm and shutdown for engine overspeed. I. Remote Annunciator Panel: Flush mounted panel with brushed stainless steel finish. The annunciator shall be powered by the engine generator storage battery to provide a warning of derangement of alarm conditions r. in the standby power plant. Provide audible and visible indicators and alarms required by NFPA 110 and as follows: 1. High battery voltage (alarm). 2. Low battery voltage (alarm). 3. Low fuel (alarm). t 4. System ready. 5. Anticipatory high water temperature. 6. Anticipatory low oil pressure. 7. Low coolant temperature. B. Switch in off position (alarm). 9. Overcrank (alarm). 10. Emergency stop (alarm). 11. High water temperature (alarm). 12. Overspeed (alarm). 13. Low oil pressure (alarm). 14. Line power available. 15. Generator power available. 1 16. Lamp test and horn silence switch. J. Weather protective Enclosure: The unit shall be shipped to the job assembled in a weatherproof shelter. The shelter shall completely enclose the charger and all other accessories. The shelter shall be constructed of welded and bolted sheet steel, 16 gauge and 14 gauge with a 14 gauge floor plate. All metal parts shall be prime coated and finish painted with machinery enamel. Each assembly shall have shuttered air openings on the front and sides, with mesh screens covering side shutters. The shelter shall have hinged double doors on each side and one door in the rear for access to the engine generator and controls. All door handles shall be of key lock design. The skid and floor design shall include a removable panel below the engine oil pan. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Mounting: The engine generator set shall be factory mounted on a welded structural steel base of box type construction. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad designed for the weight of the unit and set the steel base on the pad by installing pad type vibration isolators under the base of the unit. Isolation pads shall be properly selected and installed to minimize noise and vibration transmission. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: �.. A. General: Field inspection and testing will be performed according to the Conditions of The Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. �'" 16620 - 7 B. Full Load Test: Provide full load test utilizing portable test bank, if required, for four hours minimum. Simulate power failure including operation of transfer switch, automatic starting cycle, and automatic shutdown and return to normal. Record in 20 minute intervals during four hour test: 1. Kilowatts. 2. Amperes. 3. Voltage. 4. Coolant temperature. S. Room temperature. 6. Frequency. 7. Oil pressure. C, Alarm and Shutdown Circuits: Test alarm and shutdown circuits by simulating conditions. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. General: Prepare and start systems according to.the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Supervision: After the engine generator is installed, and before it is energized, a representative of the manufacturer shall inspect the installation and perform the prestarting checks on the unit. After his inspection is complete, he shall crank the unit and test the system for proper operation. At the time of final inspection, he shall _ demonstrate the operation of the system including starting, stopping, exercising, etc. from the transfer switches. C. Instructions: The manufacturer's representative shall allot sufficient time to instruct the owner's personnel as to the complete operation of the emergency system including the engine generator, transfer switches, service recommendations. 3.4 ADJUSTING: A. General: Adjust work according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed. 3.5 CLEANING: A. General: Clean work according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION: A. General: Provide systems demonstration according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Simulation: Simulate power outage by interrupting normal source, and demonstrate that system operates to provide emergency and standby power. END OF SECTION 16620 16620 - 8 I 7 SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. General: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SUBMITTALS: A. General: Submit manufacturer's data on all materials according to the r, Conditions of the Contract and Division l Specification Sections. E B. Product Data: Submit for review complete manufacturer's catalog information on all items specified herein, including materials, construction and UL listing. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. The contractor shall submit complete E documentation for the Fire Alarm/Life Safety System showing the Model Number, type, rating, size, style, Manufacturer's Names, and Manufacturer's Catalog Data Sheets for all items to ensure compliance m with these specifications. C. Shop Drawings: Submit for review a complete riser diagram and layout of the entire Fire Alarm / Life Safety System, showing all interconnect wiring and equipment. Provide annunciator layout and system wiring diagram showing each device and wiring connection required. D. Test Reports: Submit for review Manufacturer's test data. Indicate satisfactory completion of required tests and inspections. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for review complete manufacturer's instructions. Indicate application conditions and r limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, " preparation, installation, and starting of products. F. Operation Data: Submit for review all operation and maintenance manuals for items specified herein. Include the following in the operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Complete typewritten operating instructions. 2. Wiring diagrams for the control panel with all terminals identified. 3. A parts list for the system identifying the components with ordering numbers. 4. A plan showing conduit size and routing, number and size of conductors and locations of all devices. 5. Maintenance and repair procedures. 1.3 SCOPE: A. General: Provide and install a complete and operating 24 VDC, closed circuit, electrically supervised, zone annunciated fire alarm and detection system with emergency battery backup as shown on the drawings and described herein. It is the intent to obtain a complete system which will operate as described herein, and all equipment necessary for r. such operation shall be provided whether or not each item is enumerated herein or described on the drawings. The system shall include but not be limited to all control panels, power supplies, signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, conduit, wire, fittings, and �.. all accessories required to provide a complete operating system. t i 16721 - 1 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Code Requirements: The equipment and installation shall comply with the current applicable provisions of the following standards: 1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code, Article 760. -- 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code. 3. Local and State building codes. 4. All requirements of the Local Authority Having Jurisdiction, 5. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. .- 6. Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B. UL Listing: The system and all 'components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use in Fire Protective Signaling _ Systems under the following standards as applicable. 1.5 1 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS:, A. General: Submit according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. As -built Drawings: Record actual locations of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and end -of -line devices. Record actual wiring diagram. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS: A. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. The fire alarm installing firm shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer and shall be duly licensed in the State of Texas under Senate Bill 925. That firm shall maintain a staff of qualified technicians capable of installing and servicing the system. They shall also maintain a stock of parts and components used in the system. 1.7 GENERAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS: A. General: All equipment and material shall be new and unused, and listed by Underwriter's Laboratories for the specific intended purpose. All control panel components and field peripherals shall be designed for continuous duty without degradation of function or performance. All equipment covered by this specification or noted on Installation Drawings shall be the best equipment suited for the application and shall be provided by a single manufacturer or be recognized and U.L. listed as compatible by both manufacturers. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE: A. General: Furnish service and maintenance of fire alarm system for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS: A. General: Furnish according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Keys: Provide six keys of each type C. Smoke Detectors: Provide three of each type of automatic smoke detector. D. Printer Ribbons: Provide 6 spare printer ribbons. 16721 - 2 0 7 l r 1.10 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (MULTIPLEXED): A. General: Complete, zoned, noncoded, addressable, microprocessor -based fire detection and alarm system with manual and automatic alarm initiation. B. Alarm Verification: Provide analog addressable smoke detectors and automatic alarm verification for alarms initiated by certain smoke detector zones as indicated on the Drawings. C. Signal Transmission: Multiplex signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only. 1.11 SYSTEM OPERATION: A. Noninterfering: Zone, power, wire, and supervise the system so a signal on one zone does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other zone. All zones are manually resettable from the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) after the initiating device or devices are restored to normal. Systems that require the use of batteries or battery backup for the programming functions are not acceptable. B. Priority of Signals: Accomplish automatic response functions by the first zone initiated. Alarm functions resulting from initiation by the first zone are not altered by subsequent alarms. The highest priority is an alarm signal. Supervisory and trouble signals have second- and third -level priority. Signals of a higher level priority take precedence over signals of lower priority even though the lower - priority condition occurred first. Annunciate all alarm signals regardless of priority or order received. C. General Alarm: The actuation of any alarm initiating device shall cause the following events to immediately occur: Audible/Visual Signals: Sound all audible devices_ continuously and flash all associated visual signals. 1. Voice Evacuation: Sound all voice alarm messages continuously and flash all associated visual signals. 2. Voice Evacuation (Multiple Floor): Sound voice alarm messages on the fire floor and the floor immediately above and below that floor. 3. FACP General Alarm: Indicate the general alarm condition at the FACP 4. FACP Zone Identification: Identify the device that is the source of the alarm (or its zone) at the FACP. 5. Remote Annunciator General Alarm: Indicate the general alarm condition at the remote annunciator. 6. Remote Annunciator Zone Identification: Identify the device that is the source of the alarm (or its zone) at the remote annunciator. 7. Exit Signs: Flash all exit signs. B. Air Unit Shutdown: Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to initiate shutdown of all air handling units over 2000 CFM by zone. 9. Smoke Dampers: Transmit signal to building mechanical systems to close smoke dampers by zone. 10. Smoke Removal: Transmit signal by zone to building smoke removal system. 11. Elevator Recall: Transmit signals to building elevator control panel to initiate return to main floor or alternate floor. 12. Door Release: Transmit signal to release door hold open devices by zone. 13. Door Unlock: Unlock Designated Doors. 14. System Printer: Record the event on the system printer. 16721 - 3 D. System Trouble Detection: When a trouble condition is detected by one of the system initiating or indicating circuits, the following shall immediately occur: 1. FACP System Trouble: Indicate system trouble at the FACP. 2. FACP Audible/Visible Signal: Activate a local sounding device in the FACP which is distinct from the general alarm sound. Manual acknowledge function at FACP silences audible trouble alarm; visual alarm is displayed until initiating failure or circuit trouble is cleared. 3. Trouble Indication: Indicate the device or zone with the trouble condition. If the trouble condition is caused by module failure, power trouble, or ground fault, the corresponding trouble indication on the FACP shall operate. 4. Remote Annunciator: Indicate a visual and audible trouble alarm at remote annunciator panel. S. System Printer: Record the event on the system printer. E. Transmission to Remote Central Station: Automatically route alarm, supervisory, and trouble signals to a remote central transmitter provided under another contract, using listed and approved equipment. F. Control Switch Operation: Switches provide capability for acknowledgement of alarm; supervisory, trouble, and other specified signals at the FACP; and capability to silence the local audible signal and light alight -emitting diode (LED). Subsequent zone alarms cause the audible signal to sound again until silenced in turn by switch operation. -Restoration to normal of alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions extinguish the associated LED and cause the audible signal to sound again until the restoration is acknowledged by switch operation. G. Walk Test Operation: Walk test mode shall test initiating device .circuits and indicating device circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. Upon activation of an initiating device, the controlled outputs shall operate for approximately four seconds with circuits that were selected under walk test. Inducing a trouble into the initiating circuit shall activate the controlled outputs shall activate and remain activated until the trouble is cleared. Inducing trouble into the indicating circuit shall activate the particular circuit and pulse the circuit at a one second on/off rate until the trouble is cleared. An alarm indication, and a trouble indication shall operate upon completion of each circuit test. H. Alarm Verification Operation: Smoke detection for a zone with alarm verification causes the following: 1. Alarm Indication: Audible and visible indication of an "alarm verification" signal at the FACP. 2. Verification Sequence: Activation of a listed and approved "alarm verification" sequence at the FACP and the detector. 3. System Printer: Recording the event on the system printer. 4. Alarm Initiation: Initiate general alarm if the alarm is verified. 5. Alarm Cancellation: FACP indication cancellation and system reset if the alarm is not verified. I. Waterf low Operation: Waterflow switch operation initiates a non silenceable general alarm. 16721 - 4 I J. Sprinkler Valve Tamper Switch Operation: Sprinkler valve tamper switch operation causes or initiates the following: 1. FACP: A supervisory audible and visible "valve tamper" signal at the FACP. 2. Remote Annunciator: A supervisory audible and visible "valve tamper" signal at the remote annunciator. 3. System Printer: A printed record of the event on the system printer. 4. Remote Central Station: Transmission of supervisory signal to remote central station. K. Low Air Pressure Switch Operation: Low air pressure switch operation on a dry pipe or preaction sprinkler system causes or initiates the following: 1. FACP: A supervisory audible and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal indication at the FACP. 2. Remote Annunciator: A supervisory audible and visible "sprinkler trouble" signal at the remote annunciator. 3. System Printer: A printed record of the event on the system printer. r 4. Remote Central Station: Transmission of trouble signal to remote t central station. 5. History Mode Operation: The system shall be able to store and display the last 255 system events which have occurred. L. Remote Annunciation: Manual and automatic operation of alarm and supervisory initiating devices is annunciated both on the FACP and remote annunciator, indicating the location and type device. M. Loss of Primary Power: Loss of primary power at the FACP shall cause the following indications: 1. FACP: Sound trouble signal and illuminate emergency power light when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. 2. Remote Annunciator: Sound trouble signal and illuminate emergency power light when the system is operating on an alternate power supply. N. FACP Alphanumeric Display: Displays plain language description of alarms, trouble signals, supervisory signals, monitoring actions, system and component status, and system commands. O. Remote Detector Sensitivity Adjustment: Manipulation of controls at the FACP causes the selection of specific addressable smoke detectors for adjustment, display of their current status and sensitivity settings, and control of changes in those settings. The same controls can be used to program repetitive, scheduled, automated changes in sensitivity of specific detectors. Sensitivity adjustments and sensitivity adjustment schedule changes are recorded by the system printer. P. System Printer: Record all alarm, supervisory, and trouble events by means of a system printer. Printouts are by zone, device, function, date and time. Alarm signal are differentiated from other events. System reset is printed. A command initiates the printout of a list of existing alarm, supervisory, and trouble conditions in the system. l 1.12 SYSTEM COMPONENTS: [ A. General: Only FACP equipment and peripheral field devices have been shown on the Drawings. Specific and complete wiring between control equipment and peripheral equipment has been deleted for clarity. �•. 16721 - 5 t 1.13 MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Notifier. 2. Cerberus (Pyrotronics). 3. Simplex Time Recorder Co. 4. Edwards System Technology (EST). B. Being listed as an acceptable Manufacturer in no way relieves the Contractors obligation to meet the requirements of the specification. Listing of the manufacturer does not guarantee that their system conforms to the specification requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FACP): A. General: Comply with UL 864, "Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." B. Flush Enclosure: Modular flush wall mounted enclosure. Wall thickness shall be verified for proper thickness. C. Surface Enclosure: Modular surface wall mounted enclosure. D. Cabinet: The back box and door shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or _ other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. Arrange panel so all operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the system are performed from the front of the enclosure. If more than a single unit is required to form a complete _ control panel, provide exactly matching modular unit enclosures. Accommodate all components and allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring. Identify each enclosure by an engraved, red laminated, phenolic resin nameplate. Lettering on the enclosure nameplate shall not be less than 1 inch high. Identify individual components and modules within the cabinets with permanent labels. E. Control Modules: The FRCP shall be modular in structure for ease of installation, maintenance, and future expansion. The FACP shall be provide with the proper number and types of modules to serve all zones, indicating devices and functions as indicated on the drawings. Local, visible, and audible signals notify of alarm, supervisory, and trouble —' conditions. Each type of audible alarm has a distinctly different sound. F. Systems: Alarm and supervisory systems are separate and independent in the FACP. The alarm initiating zone boards in the FACP consist of plug in cards. Construction requiring removal of field wiring for module replacement is not acceptable. G. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls (Multiplex System): Provide control at the FACP for the addressable system components, including annunciation and supervision. A display with a minimum of 80 characters displays alarm, supervisory, and component status messages. Arrange keypad for use in entering and executing control commands. H. Smoke Detector Sensitivity (Multiplex Systems): Provide keypad control at the FACP for the control of smoke detector sensitivity and other parameters. 16721 - 6 I. System Power Supply: Comply with UL 1481 "Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." The main power supply for the FACP shall be integral to the control panel itself, and shall be adequate to serve control panel modules, remote detectors, remote annunciators, door holders, smoke dampers, relays, and alarm signaling devices. Include battery operated emergency power supply with capacity for r operating system in standby mode for 24 hours followed by alarm mode �! for 15 minutes. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. The power supply shall provide an integral variable rate battery charger which will automatically inhibit the deep discharge of the system standby batteries, and shall be protected against the accidental reverse polarity connection of the standby batteries. The main power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions, and shall have the following LED indications: �^ f 1. Negative Ground Fault LED 2. Positive Ground Fault LED 3. Battery Fail LED 4. AC Power Fail LED J. voice Alarm: An emergency communication system, integral with the FACP, includes central voice alarm system components complete with microphones, preamplifiers, tone generators and message generators. Manual or automatic alarm signals generated by the System shall be used to generate audio evacuation signals or messages which shall be distributed throughout the building's speaker circuits. All field circuits shall be fully supervised and power limited by the main control panel. K. Voice Alarm Amplifier: Comply with UL 1711, "Amplifiers for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." The voice alarm amplifier shall be sized to serve the speaker circuits. The amplifier shall include an integral power supply, and shall provide the following controls and indicators. Adjustment of the correct Audio Level for the Amplifier shall not require any special tools or test equipment. 1. Normal Audio Level LED 2. Incorrect Audio Level LED 3. Brownout LED 4. Battery Trouble LED 5. Amplifier Trouble LED 6. Audio Amplifier Gain Adjust L. Voice Alarm Channels: The Audio Subsystem shall be capable of providing up to 4 channels of Fire Alarm evacuation signals and messages. The alarm evacuation messages may be made through a microphone or through a pre-recorded message panel. M. Audio Message Generator: The Audio Message Generator shall provide up to 4 digitally -recorded voice messages, each of which may be up to 24 seconds long. A built-in microphone shall allow paging through speaker circuits. Additionally, the audio message generator produces a variety of tones including slow whoop, yelp, yeow, siren, hi/lo, and steady tone. A variety of prerecorded messages shall be available from the factory. Up to two pre-programmed messages may be installed in the F16721 - 7 system. The AMG may be commanded to produce any one of its tones or messages. The Audio Message Generator shall have the following controls and indicators to allow for proper operator understanding and control. 1. Audio Level Normal LED 2. All Call LED 3. On -Line LED 4. Amplifier Trouble LED 5. Speaker Trouble LED 6. All Call Switch 7. Local Speaker Volume Control N. Instructions: Printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a metal frame. Install the frame in a location observable from the FRCP. Include interpretation and appropriate response for displays and signals, and briefly describe the functional operation of the system under normal, alarm, and trouble conditions. 2.2 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR UNITS: A. Description: The remote annunciator panel shall be housed in a backbox designed for surface or flush mounting directly to a wall or vertical surface. The back box shall be constructed of painted steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The remote annunciator system shall provide alarm, trouble and supervisory annunciation corresponding to the FRCP, and integral control switches. 2.3 SYSTEM PRINTER: A. Description: Printer is dot matrix type, listed and labeled as an integral part of the fire alarm system. 2.4 ALARM INITIATING DEVICES: A. Manual Fire Alarm Station: Comply with UL 38, "Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes." Manual fire alarm pull stations shall be semi -flush mounted, non -coded, non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock in order that they may be tested without operating the handle, and so designed that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet, front or side. Manual stations shall be constructed of die formed, satin -finished aluminum, with operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on three sides of the Manual Station in letters one half inch in size or larger. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on matching backbox, or semi -flush mounting on standard single gang box or switchplate. B. Automatic Heat Detector: Comply with UL 521, "Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Automatic heat detectors shall be combination rate of rise and fixed temperature rated at 135 degrees F for areas where ambient temperatures do not exceed 100 degrees, and 200 degrees for areas where the temperature exceeds 100 degrees, but does not exceed 150 degrees. Automatic heat detectors shall be low profile, ceiling mount type with positive indication of activation. The rate of rise element shall consist of an air chamber, a flexible metal diaphragm, and a factory calibrated, moisture -proof, trouble free vent, and shall operate when the rate of temperature rise exceeds 15 degrees F. per minute. The fixed temperature element shall consist of a fusible alloy retainer and actuator shaft. Automatic heat detectors shall have a smooth ceiling rating of 2500 square feet. 16721 - 8 r C. Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268, "Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be optical type using an LED light source. Each detector shall contain a visual status and alarm indicator, remote LED output and a built-in test switch. Detector shall be provided on a twist -lock base that allows for mounting to a 411 outlet box. The detector shall have a nominal sensitivity of 3.0t as measured in a U.L. smoke box. Calibration sensitivity and performance test shall be performed without smoke. The detector shall not alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 3000 feet per minute. D. Thermal Backup for Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric smoke detectors shall include a built in Thermostat rated at 135 degrees F. The operation of either the smoke detector chamber or the Thermostat shall result in an alarm indication to the associated FACP. E. Duct Mounted Smoke Detectors: Comply with UL 268A "Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications." Provide duct mounted smoke detectors in the air ducts of air conditioning units where indicated on the drawings. Detectors shall be ionization or photoelectric type as indicated on the Drawings and as specified above. Duct smoke detectors shall be provided with visual alarm and power indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the air duct, with properly sized air sampling tubes. F. Duct Detector Remote Test Station: Where indicated on the Drawings provide duct detectors with remote test station and alarm LED which indicates the alarm status of the associated smoke detector. For detectors located in roof mounted air conditioning units, install the remote test stations flush in the ceiling directly below or as close as possible below the roof mounted air unit. For detectors mounted inside the building spaces, mount the remote test stations on the wall or ceiling near the detector. Provide each test station with a typewritten label indicating the unit that the detector resides in. Provide each duct detector with auxiliary contacts for air unit control interface. G. Addressable Interface: For each alarm initiating device include a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. H. Remote Control: Individually monitor each automatic smoke detector at the FACP for calibration, sensitivity, and alarm condition, and r individually adjust sensitivity from the FACP. 2.5 ALARM INDICATING DEVICES: A. Visual Only Units: Comply with UL 1638, "Visual Signaling Appliances." The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 100 candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Mount the visual only units as indicated on the drawings. 1 B. Voice Evacuation Speakers/Visual Indicating Appliances: Comply with UL 1480, "Speakers for Fire Protective Signaling." Compression driver type with flared projectors, blocking capacitor for DC line supervision, terminal blocks for the in -out connection of the field wires. Seal the back of each speaker to protect the speaker cone from damage and dust. The speakers shall have a uniform output over a frequency range from 400-4000 HZ. and shall have field selectable power taps of 1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1,2,4 and 8 watts. Match transformer tap to the acoustical environment of the speaker location. Rated sound output t shall be 96 dBa as measured in under UL Standard 1480. The speakers shall flush mount to 4" square backboxes 1 1/2 inches deep, with 1 1/2 inch extension ring. The finish shall be red/white textured enamel. F16721 - 9 The visual section of the unit shall have a minimum of 100 candela and meet or exceed the requirements of the Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA). Provide with hardware to achieve mounting as indicated on the drawings. C. Addressable Interface: For each alarm indicating device include a communication transmitter and receiver having a unique identification and capability for status reporting to the FACP. 2.6 AUXILIARY DEVICES: A. Magnetic Door Holders: Comply with UL 228, "Door Closers -Holders for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Magnetic door holders shall be electromagnetic, and shall hold fire and/or smoke barrier doors open until released by manual or automatic fire alarm activation. Power shall be 24 VAC from separate sized, UL listed transformer. B. Waterf low Switches: Comply with UL 346, "Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems." Waterf low switches shall be installed in sprinkler pipes to signal fire detection and control systems or auxiliary indicators when flow occurs. Water flowing in the pipe shall deflect a vane in the switch and cause a contact closure. C. Supervisory Switches: Supervisory switches shall be installed on sprinkler cut-off valves to indicate the closing of the valve. The switch shall be mounted on the valve actuator arm and test in a notch filed in the valve stem. If the valve stem is moved it shall force the actuator arm out of the notch thus causing the switch to operate. The switch shall be rated at 7.5 amps for 24 volts. 2.7 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE: A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16120 - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE. B. Initiating Device and Indicating Appliance Circuits: Power limited fire -protective signaling cable, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C. C. Plenum Cable: Power limited fire -protective signaling cable classified for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, suitable for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING SYSTEM: A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain fully operational until the new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN SERVICE" until the new equipment is accepted. Remove tags from new equipment when put into service and tag existing fire alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building. B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire alarm system, remove existing, disconnect fire alarm equipment and restore damaged surfaces. Package operational fire alarm and detection equipment that has been removed; deliver to the Owner. Remove from the site and legally dispose of the remainder of the existingmaterial. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. General: Installation of the fire alarm/life safety system shall be in strict compliance with manufacturers' written recommendations and NFPA Standards. Consult the manufacturers control panel and peripheral 16721 - 10 equipment installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc. before beginning system installation. Refer to the riser/connection diagram for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data. B. Mounting: All equipment shall be attached to a non load -bearing wall, and shall be held firmly in place. Fastening and supports shall be r, adequate to support the required load, and provide a safety factor of five. All fire alarm devices shall be flush mounted in the walls that they are located on with the exception of existing block wall construction. In this case, devices shall be mounted in surface mounted boxes and shall be fed with surface mounted raceway via the shortest exposed path. All surface boxes and raceways shall be in accordance with Section 16110 - RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS of these specifications. r C. FACP: FRCP will be mounted with the top of panel not more than 6 feet above floor level. The FACP shall be flush mounted in the wall with the exception of the panel being installed on an existing block wall or when located in a non-public space such as an equipment room or janitor's closet. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to final coordinate the proper wall thickness of new walls containing FACPs. D. Remote Annunciator: As indicated on the riser/connection diagram drawings, each system alarm point or zone in the system shall be uniquely labeled within the FACP. Names of the system points/zones shall be as defined by the Engineer or the Owner. Fire sprinkler activation detecting system(s) shall each be indicated on a separate zone in the FACP. E. Manual Stations: Install manual station in recessed backboxes with C operating handle 48 inches above finished floor. ` F. Audible/Visible Signal: Install audible and visual signal devices the lower of 80 inches above finished floor or 6 inches below ceiling. 1 G. Water Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve station required to be supervised. H. Conduit and Boxes: Provide complete wiring and conduit between all equipment in separate conduit, maximum 40% full. Conduits of proper size shall be installed from the control panel equipment to field devices. All field devices shall be mounted upon U.L. listed electrical junction boxes. Conduit shall not enter the FACP, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry knockouts have been provided by the factory. r I. Junction Boxes: All splices in field wiring shall be made in U.L. [[ listed electrical junction boxes. All electrical junction boxes shall be labeled as "Fire Alarm System" with decal or other approved markings. J. Power Circuit: The FACP shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. FACP primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to an equipment grounding conductor. Conduit shall enter into the FACP backbox only at those areas of the backbox which have factory conduit knockouts. K. End -of -line Devices: Mount end -of -line device in control panel. L. Door Holders: Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. �., 16721 - 11 t M. Connections: Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, fire suppression system control panels, duct smoke detectors and any other devices as required. N. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72E. Install ceiling mounted detectors not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Install detectors located on the wall at least 4 inches but not more than 12 inches below the ceiling. For exposed solid joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth ceilings, install detectors not over 30 feet apart in any direction. Install detectors no closer than 5 feet from air registers. 3.3 WIRING INSTALLATION: A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in metal raceway according to Section 16110 - "RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces and as indicated. B. Wiring Within Enclosures: Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to the terminal points with no excess. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced or interrupted in any enclosure associated with the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the wiring diagrams of the system. Make all connections with approved crimp on terminal spade lugs, pressure type terminal blocks, or plug connectors. C. Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull or outlet boxes, cabinets, or equipment enclosures where any circuit tap is made. D. Conductors: Unless otherwise specified within the installation manual of the specific equipment being used, all field wiring shall be minimum #16 (solid) or #14 type, and shall be approved for use as fire alarm cable. Cable shall be the type listed for Fire Alarm/Life Safety use and shall be installed per NEC Article 760. E. Color Coding: Provide fire alarm circuit conductors with insulation color -coded as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction box. 1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white. 2. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. 3. Detector Power Supply: Violet, brown. 4. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative). 5. Door Release: Gray, gray. 6. Municipal Trip Circuit: Orange, orange. 7. Municipal Fire Alarm Loop: Black, white. 3.4 GROUNDING (VOICE ALARM): A. General: Ground equipment and conductor cable shields. For audio circuits, minimize to the greatest extent possible ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. Provide 5 ohm ground at main equipment location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. General: Field inspection and testing will be performed according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Tests: Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. 16721 - 12 F 3.6 FINAL SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE: A. Final Test: The system will be accepted only after a satisfactory test of the entire system has been accomplished by a factory trained distributor in the presence of a representative of the authority having jurisdiction and the Owner's representative. B. As -built Drawings: The distributor will present a complete set of "as -built" Fire Alarm/Life Safety system drawings, and the factory supplied Operator's Manual to the Building Owner's representative and the local AHJ. A maximum fee of $100.00 will be charged to the r, distributor/contractor for obtaining the fire ,alarm plan(s) and/or t floor plan(s) on diskette from the electrical engineer. Diskette will be provided upon receipt of check. r C. Service: The distributor shall make available contracted periodic f system testing, maintenance, and/or calibration services. 3.7 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES: A. General: Prepare and start systems according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Factory Technician: The distributor shall provide the on -site services of an authorized, factory trained technical representative to supervise all connections and fully test all devices and components of the system during installation phase. C. Training: The distributor shall provide comprehensive training on the operation, proper use, and testing of the installed fire alarm system to the Building Owner's Representative, and the local AHJ. r 3.8 DEMONSTRATION: ` A. General: Provide systems demonstration under provisions of the General Requirements. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and E required responses to each. END OF SECTION 16721 7 16721 - 13